Yamaha MODX8 Handleiding

Type
Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

MUSIC SYNTHESIZER
Contents
Using the MODX Manuals..........................................2
Basic Structure 3
Functional Blocks ......................................................3
Tone Generator Block................................................4
Tone Generator block ...................................................... 4
A/D Input Block ........................................................10
Sequencer Block ......................................................10
Arpeggio Block.........................................................11
Arpeggio categories....................................................... 11
Sub categories............................................................... 11
Arpeggio Type Name..................................................... 12
Arpeggio-related settings............................................... 13
Arpeggio playback types................................................ 14
Creating an Arpeggio..................................................... 16
Motion Sequencer Block .........................................17
Effect Block ..............................................................19
Effect structure............................................................... 19
Effect connection ........................................................... 20
About the Vocoder Effect............................................... 20
Envelope Follower Block.........................................21
Controller Block .......................................................22
Keyboard ....................................................................... 22
Pitch Bend wheel ........................................................... 22
Modulation wheel........................................................... 22
Assignable Switches...................................................... 22
Knobs and Control Sliders ............................................. 22
Super Knob.................................................................... 22
Internal Memory .......................................................23
Reference 25
Display (touch panel) configuration ...................... 25
Performance Play (Home)....................................... 27
Motion Control......................................................... 33
Mixing ....................................................................... 50
Scene........................................................................ 55
Play/Rec ................................................................... 60
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit........................................ 66
Element Common Edit (Common) .................................66
Element Edit (Element) ................................................107
Element All (All Element) .............................................130
Drum Part Edit ....................................................... 133
Key Common Edit (Common) ......................................133
Key Edit (Key) ..............................................................140
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit ........................................ 145
Operator Common Edit (Common) ..............................145
Operator Edit (Operator) ..............................................155
Common/Audio Edit (Common/Audio)................ 159
Category Search.................................................... 176
Performance Category Search.....................................176
Arpeggio Category Search (Arp Category Search)......180
Waveform Category Search (Waveform Search).........182
Rhythm Pattern ............................................................184
Utility ...................................................................... 187
Live Set................................................................... 212
Live Set ........................................................................212
Live Set Edit (Edit) .......................................................213
Live Set Register (Register).........................................216
Connecting an iPhone or iPad ............................. 217
Reference Manual
EN
MODX Reference Manual
2
Using the MODX Manuals
Your MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 synthesizer comes with four different reference guides—the Owner’s Manual, the Reference
Manual (this document), the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and the Data List. While the Owner’s Manual is packaged together
with the synthesizer as a hardcopy booklet, this Reference Manual, the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and the Data List are
available for download from our web page as PDF documents.
Owners Manual (hardcopy booklet)
Describes how to set up your MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 and how to perform basic operations.
This manual explains the following operations.
Selecting Performances
Playing the Keyboard
Creating Your Own Live Sets
Editing the Settings
Recording and Playback
Using as a Master Keyboard
Connecting a Microphone or Audio Equipment
Making Global System Settings
Connecting External MIDI Instruments
Using a Connected Computer
Saving/Loading Data
Reference Manual (this PDF document)
Describes the internal design of your MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 and the various parameters that can be adjusted and set.
Synthesizer Parameter Manual (PDF document)
Explains the Part parameters, effect types, effect parameters, and MIDI messages that are used for synthesizers incorporating
the Yamaha AWM2 and FM-X tone generators. Read the Owners Manual and Reference Manual first and then use this
parameter manual, if necessary, to learn more about parameters and terms that relate to Yamaha synthesizers.
Data List (PDF document)
Provides lists such as the Waveform List, Performance List, Effect Type List, Arpeggio Type List, as well as reference materials
such as the MIDI Implementation Chart.
Using the Reference Manual
Using the display name tabs along the upper part of each page from the
Reference section, you can jump to the page for parameter
explanations of the corresponding display.
You can click on any page number from the Table of Contents or within
descriptive text to jump to the corresponding page.
You can also click on desired items and topics you want to refer to in the
“Bookmarks” index to the left of the main window, and jump to the
corresponding page. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is
not displayed.)
If you want to find information on a specific topic, function or feature,
select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter
a key word to locate the related information anywhere in the document.
NOTE The most-recent version of Adobe
®
Reader
®
can be downloaded from the
following web page.
http://www.adobe.com/products/reader/
NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version
of Adobe Reader being used.
Information
The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat
different from those on your instrument.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
iPhone, iPad, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part S ettin gs
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LF O
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Typ e
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
66
Reference
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
A Normal Part (AWM2) (having pitched musical instrument sounds) can consist of up to eight Elements.
An Element is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. There are two types of Normal Part (AWM2) Edit displays:
Element Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Elements; and Element Edit display,
for editing individual Elements.
Element Common Edit (Common)
From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan.
Part Category Main (Part Main Category)
Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)
Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Par t.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Part Name
Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
Volume (Part Volume)
Determines the output level of the selected Part.
Settings: 0–127
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.
Settings: L63–C–R63
Part Settings
General
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] Æ [EDIT] Æ Part selection Æ Element [Common] Æ [Part Settings] Æ
[General]
Select the display name tab Select the function
MODX Reference Manual
3
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Basic Structure
Functional Blocks
The MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 system consists of eight main functional blocks: Tone Generator, A/D Input,
Sequencer, Motion Sequencer, Arpeggio, Controller, Effect, and Envelope Follower.
AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2)
This instrument is equipped with an AWM2 tone generator block. AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2)
is a synthesis system based on sampled waves (sound material), and is used in many Yamaha
synthesizers. For extra realism, each AWM2 Voice uses multiple samples of a real instrument’s
waveform. Furthermore, a wide variety of parameters—envelope generator, filter, modulation, and
others—can be applied.
MIDI IN AUDIO IN AUDIO OUTMIDI OUT
[USB TO HOST]
MIDI [OUT]
[USB TO HOST]
MIDI [IN]
[USB TO HOST]
A/D INPUT [L/MONO] [R]
[USB TO HOST]
OUTPUT [L/MONO] [R]
Controller Block (
page 22
)
Keyboard
Controllers
(such as Super Knob)
Tone Generator (page 4)
AWM2 Tone Generator
FM-X Tone Generator
16 Parts
Performances
Sequencer Block
(page 10)
16-Track
MIDI Sequencer
Songs
Effects (page 19)
System Effects
13 Insertion Effects
Element EQ
Part EQ
Master Effect
Master EQ
A/D Input
(page 10)
Motion Sequencer Block
(page 17)
Envelope
Follower Block
(page 21)
Arpeggio Block
(page 11)
Arpeggio Playback x 8
Preset Arpeggio
User Arpeggio
Computer
External MIDI equipment
Computer Computer Powered
speakers, etc.
Control Message Flow
Audio Signal Flow
Microphone,
audio equipment,
etc.
MODX Reference Manual
4
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Tone Generator Block
The tone generator block is what actually produces sound in response to the MIDI messages received
from the Sequencer block, Controller block, Arpeggio block and from the external MIDI instrument. The
MIDI messages are assigned to sixteen independent channels, and the instrument is capable of
simultaneously playing sixteen separate Parts, via the sixteen MIDI channels. However, the sixteen-
channel limit can be overcome by using separate MIDI “ports,” each supporting sixteen channels. The
tone generator block of this instrument can handle MIDI messages over Port 1.
Tone Generator block
A Performance is a single set of sounds consisting of multiple Parts. You can change sounds as desired by
selecting the appropriate Performance. Each Performance has two types of parameters; parameters
unique to each Part and parameters common to all Parts. You can edit the entire Performance in the
Common/Audio Edit display (page 159).
A Performance consists of 16 Parts and you can create Performances (in which multiple Parts or Parts are
combined—in a layer, or in other configurations) using the keyboard.
Internally, there are three Part types: Normal Parts (AWM2), Normal Parts (FM-X), and Drum Parts. Normal
Parts (AWM2) are mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds that can be played over the full range of
the keyboard. Normal Parts (FM-X) are also mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds, using FM
synthesis. Drum Parts are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes. A Normal
Part (AWM2) can consist of up to eight Elements, a Normal Part (FM-X) can consist of up to eight
Operators, and a Drum Part can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys.
An Element/Operator/Drum Key is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. By combining multiple Elements/
Operators/Keys, Parts can be created to produce even more realistic sounds or various richly textured
types of sound. Each Part is created by editing parameters unique to each (Element Edit parameters/
Operator Edit parameters/Key Edit parameters) and parameters common to all the Elements/Operators/
Keys (Element Common Edit, Operator Common Edit, and Key Common Edit parameters.)
NOTE For instructions on editing a Normal Part (AWM2), see page 66. For instructions on editing a Normal Part (FM-X),
see page 145. For instructions on editing a Drum Part, see page 133.
FM-X
This synthesizer also features an FM-X tone generator, in addition to the AWM2 block. The
abbreviation “FM” of FM-X stands for “frequency modulation,” which is a special tone generation
system that uses the frequency of one waveform to modulate another waveform, in order to produce a
completely new one. In this synthesizer, there are eight FM Operators and a full 88 different Algorithm
types. By changing the operator combination patterns, controlling the modulation with other
parameters such as levels and envelopes, and using high-quality filters, effects, and EQ commonly
with AWM2, you can create richly textured sounds that change in a highly complex fashion.
Performances
Part structure of a Performance
Parts
MODX Reference Manual
5
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Normal Parts (AWM2)
These Parts are played conventionally from the
keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each key,
generated by AWM2. A Normal Part consists of up to
eight Elements. Depending on the settings in the Part
Edit, these Elements are sounded simultaneously, or
different Elements are sounded according to the note
range, velocity range and the XA (Expanded
Articulation) settings (page 6).
The illustration shows an example of a Normal Part (AWM2). Since the six Elements here are distributed
across both the note range of the keyboard and the velocity range, a different Element sounds depending
on which note you play and how strongly you play it. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3 and 5 sound
when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In the note
distribution, Elements 1 and 2 sound in the lower range of the keyboard, Elements 3 and 4 sound in the
middle range, and Elements 5 and 6 sound in the higher range. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3
and 5 sound when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In
a practical example of this in use, a piano Part could be composed of six different samples. Elements 1, 3
and 5 would be the sounds of the piano played softly, over the respective note ranges, while Elements 2, 4
and 6 would be strongly played sounds, for each respective note range. Actually, this instrument is even
more flexible than this, since it allows up to eight independent Elements.
Normal Parts (FM-X)
These Parts are also played conventionally from the keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each
key, generated by FM synthesis. The sound for a Normal Part (FM-X) is created by modulating a frequency
of a fundamental waveform with another waveform. An operator that generates a fundamental waveform is
a “carrier,” and an operator that modulates these waveforms is a “modulator.” The combination of a
number of Operators is called “Algorithm.”
When the waveform output from the Operator is a simple sine wave, no harmonics are included other than
the fundamental tone. However, you can create harmonics by modulating the waveform with other
Operators. How harmonics can be created depends on the Modulators’ output levels and the frequency
rates of Carriers and Modulators. On the other hand, the basic pitch is determined by Carrier’s frequency,
and the output level is determined by the Carrier’s output level. The figure described below shows a basic
way to create FM sound by using an analog synthesizer.
Although the figure described above shows waveforms which are generated by two operators, the MODX
has eight Operators. The combination of a number of Operators is called anAlgorithm” and this
synthesizer has parameters for setting the Algorithm.
Drum Parts
Drum Parts are mainly percussion/drum sounds
that are assigned to individual notes on the
keyboard (C0 to C6). Unlike Elements, a Drum
key is equivalent to the corresponding note,
meaning that you cannot change its range.
Drum or percussion sounds are assigned to
each Drum Key. You can create various types of
Drum Parts by changing the drum or percussion sound assigned to each key and edit the parameters
such as pitch and EG.
Normal Parts (AWM2), Normal Parts (FM-X), and Drum Parts
Velocity
Element 1
Element 2
Element 3
Element 4
Element 5
Element 6
Modulator OP
Frequency ratio of the
Modulator and the Carrier
determines the base waveform
including specific harmonics by
the Oscillator.
Modulator output level
determines the Cutoff
Frequency of the Filter.
Carrier OP
Modulation
Modulator envelope determines
the Filter envelope.
Carrier frequency determines
the pitch of the Oscillator.
Carrier output level
determines the volume
by using the amplifier.
Carrier envelope determines
the amplifier envelope.
C0
C1 C6
Individual drum
sounds
(different for
each key)
MODX Reference Manual
6
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Expanded Articulation (XA) is a tone generation system that provides greater performance flexibility and
acoustic realism. This feature allows you to more effectively recreate realistic sound and natural
performance techniques—such as legato and staccato—and provides other unique modes for random
and alternate sound changes as you play.
Realistic legato performance
This instrument more accurately reproduces a legato effect by allowing specific Elements to be sounded
when playing legato and other Elements to be played normally (with the XA Control parameter settings
“Normal” and “Legato”).
Authentic note release sound
The MODX reproduces these special, characteristic sounds by setting the XA Control parameter of certain
Elements to “Key Off.”
Subtle sound variations for each note played
The MODX more accurately reproduces these subtle sound variations by using the XA Control parameter
settings “Cycle” and “Random.”
Switching among different sounds to recreate the natural performance on an
acoustic instrument
Acoustic instruments have their own unique characteristics—even specific, unique sounds that are
produced only at certain times in a performance. These include the flutter tonguing on a flute or the
playing of high harmonics on an acoustic guitar. The MODX recreates these by allowing you to switch
between the sounds while you play—using the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] buttons and the XA Control
parameter settings, “A.SW1 On,” “A.SW2 On” and “A.SW Off.”
NOTE You can turn the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button on or off also by transmitting the Control Change number
specified in the Common/Audio Edit display ([Control] [Control Number]) (page 167) from an external device.
New sounds and new styles of playing
The highly versatile functions above can be applied effectively not only to acoustic sounds but also to
synthesizer and electronic Parts as well. The XA feature opens up enormous potential for realizing
authentic sounds, performing expressively and coming up with creative new styles of playing.
The Motion Control System is a completely new feature for variably controlling Motions (rhythmical,
multidimensional sound changes) in real time. This amazingly powerful feature dramatically and
dynamically alters the sounds of the instrument in new, never-heard-before ways—changing texturally,
rhythmically with the beats, providing cool, colorful lighting effects, and responding expressively to your
creative passion. The Motion Control System has three main functions:
Super Knob:
For creating multi-dimensional sonic changes, and enhancing those changes with colorful, continually
shifting lighting changes. Multiple parameters can be controlled simultaneously.
Motion Sequencer:
For continually variable sound changes. The powerful Motion Sequencer feature lets you dynamically
change sounds by operating Parameters depending on sequences created in advance. It provides real
time control for changing sounds depending on various sequences such as Tempo, Arpeggio, or the
rhythm of external connected devices.
Envelope Follower:
Envelope Follower is a function for detecting the volume envelope of the input signal waveform and
modifying sounds dynamically.
NOTE Envelope Follower can be controlled not only by the audio signal from an external device, but also by the output
of all Parts.
Expanded Articulation (XA)
Motion Control System
MODX Reference Manual
7
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
For details on the Motion Control, refer to the website below:
http://www.yamaha.com/modx/
Motion Control System Structure
Continuous control of
Motion changes
Switch between Motions
Trigger, Hold
Control the Motion
Sequencer in real time
AUDIO BEAT
Part 1–16
A/D Input Part
Audio Beat Sync
External MIDI
Internal Tempo
Envelope Follower Motion Sequencer
Super Knob
Rhythmic change
Automation
Multi-dimensional
sonic change
Tone generator
Effect
MODX Reference Manual
8
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Elements/Drum Keys/Operators are the smallest “building blocks” in the MODX that comprise a Part.
These small sound units can be built, enhanced and processed by a variety of traditional synthesizer
parameters, such as Pitch EG, Filter EG, Amplitude EG, and LFO (shown below).
Oscillator
This unit allows you to assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element/Operator/Key.
Oscillator-related parameters can be set as follows.
For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts
[EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Osc/Tune] (page 107, page 140)
For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT] Part selection Operator selection [Form/Freq] (page 155)
Pitch
This unit allows you to control how the pitch changes over time. Pitch-related parameters can be set as
follows.
For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts
[EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Osc/Tune] (page 107, page 140)
For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Pitch/Filter] (page 148)
Parameters related to Pitch EG can be set as follows.
For Normal Parts (AWM2)
[EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Pitch EG] (page 111)
For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Pitch/Filter] (page 148)
Filter
This unit modifies the tone of the sound by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound.
Also, by setting the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator), you can control how the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter
changes over time. Parameters related to Filter and Filter EG can be set as follows.
For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts
[EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Filter] (page 113, page 142)
For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Pitch/Filter] (page 148)
Elements, Drum Keys and Operators
LFO
Low Frequency Oscillator
OSC (Oscillator)
Waveform (AWM2)
PITCH
Controls the pitch of
the sound.
Pitch EG
(Pitch Envelope
Generator)
FILTER
Changes the tonal
quality of the
sound.
AMP
Controls the output
level (amplitude) of
the sound.
Filter EG
(Filter Envelope
Generator)
Amplitude EG
(Amplitude Envelope
Generator)
MODX Reference Manual
9
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Amplitude
This unit controls the output level (amplitude) of the Element/Drum Key/Operator.
Parameters related to Amplitude and Amplitude EG can be set as follows.
For Normal Parts (AWM2)
[EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Amplitude] (page 121)
For Drum Parts
[EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Level/Pan] (page 143)
For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT] Part selection Operator selection [Level] (page 157)
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
As its name suggests, the LFO produces a wave of a low frequency.
These waves can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude of each Element/Operator to create effects
such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. There are two LFO types: Part LFO, which is common to all Elements/
Operators, and Element LFO, which is unique for each Element.
Parameters related to Part LFO can be set as follows.
For Normal Parts (AWM2)
[EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Mod/Control] [Part LFO] (page 96)
For Normal Parts (FM-X)
[EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Mod/Control] [Part LFO] or [2nd LFO] (page 152)
Parameters related to Element LFO can be set as follows.
[EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Element LFO] (page 126)
Maximum Polyphony
Maximum polyphony refers to the highest number of notes that can be sounded simultaneously from
the internal tone generator of the instrument.
The maximum polyphony of this synthesizer is 128 for AWM2 and 64 for FM-X. When the internal tone
generator block receives a number of notes exceeding the maximum polyphony, previously played
notes are cut off. Keep in mind that this may be especially noticeable with Parts not having decay.
Furthermore, the maximum polyphony applies to the number of Elements/Drum Keys used, not the
number of Parts. When Normal Parts (AWM2) that include up to eight Elements are used, the
maximum number of simultaneous notes may be less than 128.
MODX Reference Manual
10
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
A/D Input Block
This block handles the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Various parameters
such as volume, pan, and effect can be set for the audio signal and the sound is output together with other
Parts. An Insertion Effect, the System Effects, the Master Effects, and the Master EQ can be applied to the
audio signal input via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Parameters related to the A/D Input block can be set as follows.
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Mixing] (page 50)
[EDIT] Part [Common] [Audio In] [Mixing] (page 161)
The Effect which is applied to the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks can be set as
follows.
[EDIT] Part [Common] [Audio In] [Routing] (page 162)
The gain of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks can be adjusted via the A/D INPUT
[GAIN] knob on the panel. Moreover, the on/off setting of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/
[R] jacks can be turned on/off via the A/D INPUT [ON/OFF] button.
[UTILITY] [Settings] [Audio I/O] “A/D Input” (page 190)
Sequencer Block
This lets you create Songs by recording and editing your performances as MIDI data (from the controller
block or an external device), allowing you to play the data back with the tone generator block.
A Song is created by recording your keyboard performance as MIDI sequence data to individual Tracks.
The MODX can store up to 128 Songs.
This is a memory location on the sequencer where your musical performances are stored. One Part can be
recorded to one track. Since the MODX has 16 tracks for one Song, you can record and play back a 16-
Part performance.
You can record your keyboard performance to the Song. You can record knob operations, controller
operations and Arpeggio playback as well as your keyboard playing to the specified Track as MIDI events.
Your keyboard performance and controller/knob operations will be recorded to the Track when the
corresponding Keyboard Control Switch for the Part is turned ON.
NOTE The Control Change messages and Parameter Change messages can be recorded by operating the Knobs. For
details on Control Change messages, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
NOTE For detailed instruction, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Songs
Tracks
MIDI recording
MODX Reference Manual
11
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Arpeggio Block
This block lets you automatically trigger musical and rhythmic phrases by simply pressing a note or notes
on the keyboard. Yamaha’s Arpeggio sequence also changes in response to the actual notes or chords
you play, giving you a wide variety of inspiring musical phrases and ideas—both in composing and
performing.
Arpeggio categories
The Arpeggio types are divided into 18 categories (including “No Assign” and “Control/Hybrid Seq”) as
listed below. The categories are based on instrument type.
Sub categories
The Arpeggio categories are divided into the sub categories listed below. Because the sub categories are
listed based on the music genre, it is easy to find the sub category appropriate for your desired music
style.
NOTE In the Category Search display, the Sub Categories marked with an asterisk (*) are displayed only when
“Control/Hybrid Seq” is selected as the Category type.
Arpeggio Type Category List
Piano Piano Pad Pad/Choir
Keys Keyboard SynCp Syn Comp
Organ Organ CPerc Chromatic Perc
Gtr Guitar Dr/Pc Drum/Perc
Bass Bass S.FX Sound FX
Str String M.FX Musical FX
Brass Brass Ethnc Ethnic
WW Woodwind --- No Assign
SynLd Syn Lead Ct/Hb Control / Hybrid Seq
Arpeggio Type Sub Category List
Rock Rock World World
Pop Rock Pop Rock General General
Ballad Ballad No Assign No Assign
Chill Chillout / Ambient Filter Filter *
Hip Hop Hip Hop Exprs Expression *
Funk Funk Pan Pan *
Modern R&B Modern R&B Mod Modulation *
Classic R&B Classic R&B PBend Pitch Bend *
House House / Dance Pop Assign Assign 1/2 *
Techno Techno / Trance Comb Comb *
Jazz Jazz / Swing Zone Zone Velocity *
D&B D&B / Breakbeats Z.Pad Zone Vel for Pad *
Latin Latin
MODX Reference Manual
12
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Arpeggio Type Name
The Arpeggio Types are named according to certain rules and abbreviations. Once you understand these
rules and abbreviations, you’ll find it easy to browse through and select the desired Arpeggio Types.
Arpeggio types with “_N” at the end of the type name (example: HipHop1_N)
These Arpeggios are for using with the Normal Part, and Arpeggios with complex notes can be created
even when triggered by one note (page 14).
Arpeggio types with “_C” at the end of the type name (example: Rock1_C)
These Arpeggios are for using with the Normal Part, and correct Arpeggios can be created corresponding
to the chord you play (page 14).
Arpeggio types with a normal name (example: UpOct1)
In addition to the above types, there are three playback types: the Arpeggios created for use of Normal
Parts and played back using only the played notes and their octave notes (page 14), the Arpeggios
created for use of Drum Parts (page 15), and Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events (page 15).
Arpeggio types with “_AF1”, “_AF2”, or “_AF1&2” at the end of the type name
(example: Electro Pop AF1)
When these Arpeggios are played, both of [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are automatically turned
ON and the phrase starts playback.
Arpeggio types with [Mg] at the beginning of the type name (example:
[Mg]HardRock1)
These Arpeggios are for using with a Mega Voice.
The Arpeggio Type List in the Data List PDF document contains the following columns.
NOTE Note that this list is for illustration purposes only. For a complete listing of the Arpeggio Types, see the Data List
PDF document.
Main Category
Indicates an Arpeggio Main Category.
Sub Category
Indicates an Arpeggio Sub Category.
ARP No (Arpeggio Number)
Indicates the Arpeggio type number.
ARP Name (Arpeggio Name)
Indicates the Arpeggio Name.
Mega Voices and Mega Voice Arpeggios
Normal sound uses velocity switching to make the sound quality and/or level of a Part change
according to how strongly or softly you play the keyboard—giving greater authenticity and natural
response to these Parts. However Mega Voices have a very complex structure with many different
layers that are not suitable for playing manually. Mega Voices were developed specifically to be
played by Mega Voice Arpeggios to produce incredibly realistic results. You should always use Mega
Voices with Mega Voice Arpeggios.
Main
Category
Sub
Category
ARP
No.
ARP Name
Time
Signature
Length
Original
Tempo
Accent
Random
SFX
Sound Type
ApKb Rock 1 MA_70s Rock _ES 4 / 4 2 130 Acoustic Piano
ApKb Rock 2 MB_70s Rock _ES 4 / 4 1 130 :
ApKb Rock 3 MC_70s Rock 4 / 4 2 130
ApKb Rock 4 MD_70s Rock 4 / 4 4 130
ApKb Rock 5 FA_70s Rock 4 / 4 1 130
ApKb Rock 6 FB_70s Rock _ES 4 / 4 1 130
ApKb Rock 7 FC_70s Rock _ES 4 / 4 2 130
MODX Reference Manual
13
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Time Signature
Indicates the time signature or meter of the Arpeggio type.
Length
Indicates the data length (amount of measures) of the Arpeggio type. When the Loop parameter
*1
is
set to “off,” the Arpeggio plays back for this length and stops.
Original Tempo
Indicates the appropriate tempo value of the Arpeggio type. Note that this tempo is not set
automatically when selecting an Arpeggio type.
Accent
The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the Accent Phrase feature (page 14).
Random SFX
The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the SFX feature (page 14).
Sound Type
Indicates the sound type appropriate for the Arpeggio Type.
*1 The Loop parameter is set as follows.
[EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Common] (page 82)
Arpeggio-related settings
There are several methods for triggering and stopping the Arpeggio playback. In addition, you can set
whether or not SFX sounds and special Accent Phrases are triggered along with the normal sequence
data.
The following three settings are available for turning the Arpeggio playback on/off.
NOTE “Hold” is set as follows.
[EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Common] (page 82)
NOTE When receiving a MIDI sustain message (control change #64) with both of “Arp Master” and “Arp Part” set to
“On,” you can obtain the same result by setting “Hold” to “On.”
NOTE “Trigger Mode” is set as follows.
[EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Advanced] (page 87)
By pressing the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button and selecting “ARP/MS,” you can
use the Knobs 1–2 to control Arpeggio playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the sound. For
details regarding the effect of the Knobs 1–2, see Quick Edit (page 37).
Turning Arpeggio playback on/off
To play the Arpeggio only when the note is
pressed:
Set the “Hold” parameter to “Off” and the “Trigger
Mode” parameter to “Gate.”
To continue the Arpeggio even if the note is
released:
Set the “Hold” parameter to “On” and the “Trigger
Mode” parameter to “Gate.”
To toggle the Arpeggio playback on/off
whenever the note is pressed:
Set the “Trigger Mode” parameter to “Toggle.” The
“Hold” parameter can be set to either “On” or “Off.”
Using the Knobs to control Arpeggios
Arpeggio functions which can be controlled by Knob operations
Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4
MODX Reference Manual
14
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when
you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold
parameter.
If it is hard to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “Vel Threshold” (Accent
Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value.
NOTE “Vel Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter is set as follows.
[EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Advanced] (page 87)
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF
document.
Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar fret
noises) when the note is released. The following parameters affecting Random SFX are provided.
NOTE “Random SFX,” “Velocity Offset,” and “Key On Ctrl” are set as follows.
[EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Advanced] (page 87)
NOTE The Random SFX function is not available for the Arpeggio which stops when the note is released.
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use the Random SFX function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the
Data List PDF document.
Arpeggio playback types
There are three main Arpeggio playback types as described below.
Arpeggio types (belonging to all categories except for Drum/Perc and a part of Control/HybridSeq)
created for use of Normal Parts have the following three playback types.
Playback of played notes only
The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note(s) and octave notes.
Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played notes
These Arpeggio types have the several sequences each of which is suited for a certain chord type. Even if
you press only one note, the Arpeggio is played back using the programmed sequence—meaning that
notes other than the ones you play may be sounded. Pressing another note triggers a transposed
sequence using the pressed note as the new root note. Adding notes to those already held changes the
sequence accordingly. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_N” at the end of the type name.
Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played chord
These Arpeggio types created for use with Normal Parts are played back to match the chord type
determined by detecting the notes you play on the keyboard. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_C”
at the end of the type name.
NOTE When the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Sort” or “Sort+Drct,” the same sequence is played back no matter
what order you play the notes. When the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Thru” or “Thru+Drct,” a different
sequence is played back depending on the order you play the notes.
NOTE Since these types are programmed for Normal Parts, using them with Drum Parts may not produce musically
appropriate results.
Accent Phrases
Random SFX
For turning the Random SFX on/off: Random SFX parameter
For setting the volume of the SFX sound: Velocity Offset (Random SFX Velocity Offset)
parameter
For determining whether or not the volume of
the SFX sound is controlled by velocity:
Key On Ctrl (Random SFX Key on Control) parameter
Arpeggios for Normal Parts
MODX Reference Manual
15
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Arpeggio types in Drum/Perc categories are programmed specifically for use with Drum Parts, giving you
instant access to various rhythm patterns. Three different playback types are available.
Playback of a drum pattern
Pressing any note(s) will trigger the same rhythm pattern.
Playback of a drum pattern, plus additional played notes (assigned drum
instruments)
Pressing any note will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Adding notes to the one already held produces
additional sounds (assigned drum instruments) for the drum pattern.
Playback only of the played notes (assigned drum instruments)
Playing a note or notes will trigger a rhythm pattern using only the notes played (assigned drum
instruments). Keep in mind that even if you play the same notes, the triggered rhythm pattern differs
depending on the order of the notes played. This gives you access to different rhythm patterns using the
same instruments simply by changing the order in which you play the notes, when the “Key Mode”
parameter is set to “Thru” or “Thru+Drct.”
NOTE The three playback types above are not distinguished by category name or type name. You’ll have to actually
play the types and hear the difference.
NOTE Since these types are programmed for Drum Parts, using them with Normal Parts may not produce musically
appropriate results.
Arpeggio types (in Control/HybridSeq main categories with Filter, Expression, Pan, Modulation, Pitch
Bend, and Assign 1/2 sub categories) are programmed primarily with Control Change and Pitch Bend
data. They are used to change the tone or pitch of the sound, rather than play specific notes.
In fact, some types contain no note data at all. When using a type of this category, set the “Key Mode”
parameter to “Direct,” “Sort+Drct,” or “Thru+Drct.”
NOTE Settings related to Key Mode are set as follows.
[EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Common] (page 82)
Arpeggios for Drum Parts
Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events
Tips for Arpeggio playback
Arpeggios not only provide inspiration and full rhythmic passages over which you can perform, they
give you quality MIDI data you can use in creating Songs, or fully formed backing parts to be used in
your live performances. For instructions on using Arpeggio, see the Owner’s Manual.
MODX Reference Manual
16
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Creating an Arpeggio
In addition to using the preset Arpeggios, you can also create your own original Arpeggio data. First,
record a phrase to Song Tracks (up to a maximum of four). Then, convert the Song (or the MIDI sequence
data) to Arpeggio data from the Put Track to Arpeggio display.
1 Record MIDI sequence data to a Song.
2 Convert the MIDI sequence data (recorded to the Song) to Arpeggio data.
Determining how Song/Pattern data is converted to an Arpeggio – Convert Type
MIDI sequence data (of Song Tracks) can be converted to Arpeggio data in one of three ways, according
to the Convert types below. These types can also be selected independently for each destination Track—
providing enormous flexibility and performance control.
Record the MIDI sequence data to a Song Track, referring to the previous instructions in this chapter as
needed. The examples listed below are used as reference.
Creating a rhythm pattern (using a Drum Voice)
Creating a bass line (using a Normal Voice)
Normal (Normal Arpeggio) The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes.
Fixed Playing any note(s) will trigger the same MIDI sequence data.
OrgNotes (Original Notes) Basically same as “Fixed” with the exception that the Arpeggio playback notes
differ according to the played chord.
Track 1 Record a basic rhythm pattern using various drum instruments. Convert via “Fixed.”
Track 2–4 Record a different rhythm pattern using a specific drum instrument to
each Track.
Convert via “Normal.”
Track 1 Record a bass line using a specific desired key
(root).
Convert via “OrgNote” after the OrgNotes Root is
set.
Track 2–4 off
Song
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
Track 5
Track 6
Track 7
Track 8
Track 9
Track 10
Track 11
Track 12
Track 13
Track 14
Track 15
Track 16
Recording
Recording
Recording
Recording
Convert
Arpeggio
User Arpeggio 256
User Arpeggio 001
Track 1
Track 2
Track 3
Track 4
After the above procedure, select tracks from the Put Track to
Arpeggio display (page 63) to convert the Song to your own
Arpeggio.
You can record MIDI sequence data for the
Arpeggio to any of the Tracks. After recording,
select four Tracks from all sixteen and convert
them to Arpeggio data.
[SONG] (Play) button
or
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [MIDI]
Touch the Song Name [User Arp]
MODX Reference Manual
17
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Motion Sequencer Block
The powerful Motion Sequencer feature lets you dynamically change sounds by operating Parameters
depending on sequences created in advance.
It provides real time control for changing sounds depending on various sequences such as Tempo,
Arpeggio, or the rhythm of external connected devices.
You can assign up to eight desired Sequence types for one Lane.
You can also set up to four Lanes corresponding to the Motion Sequencer function for one Part. Up to eight
Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance.
The setting status (on or off) the Lanes in the entire Performance will be shown as follows.
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Motion Seq] (page 44)
Also, the parameters for each Lane are set as follows.
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element/Operator [Common] [Motion Seq]
[Lane] (page 91)
The following settings are available for turning the Motion Sequencer playback on/off.
NOTE “LaneSW” and “Trigger” are set as follows.
[EDIT] Part selection Element/Operator [Common] [MOTION Seq] [Lane] (page 91)
Turning the Motion Sequencer on/off
To play the Motion Sequence when the note is
pressed:
Set the “LaneSW” parameter to “On,” the “Trigger”
parameter to “Off,” and the” Sync” parameter to “Off.”
To play the Motion Sequence when the
[MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button is pressed:
Set the “LaneSW” parameter to “On,” the “Trigger”
parameter to “On,” and the “Sync” parameter to “Off.”
Lane setting
Sequence Patterns for the Lane
Selected Sequence setting Lane setting
MODX Reference Manual
18
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
By pressing the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button and selecting “ARP/MS,” you can
use the Knobs 3–4 to control Motion Sequencer playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the
sound. For details regarding the effect of the Knobs 3–4, see Quick Edit (page 37).
You can create a custom Motion Sequence consisting of up to sixteen steps. For details about Editing, see
page 93.
In this instrument, Motion Sequencer is considered as a virtual controller and can be selectable in the
“Source” parameter. The target parameter you want to control by Motion Sequencer is set in the
“Destination” parameter. For details, see page 100.
Using the Knobs to control Motion Sequencer
Editing Motion Sequences
Parameters related to Motion Sequencer
Motion Sequencer functions which can be controlled by Knob operations
Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4
MODX Reference Manual
19
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Effect Block
This block applies effects to the output of the tone generator block as well as audio input block,
processing and enhancing the sound. Effects are applied in the final stages of editing, letting you change
the sound as desired.
Effect structure
System Effects are applied to the overall sound. With System Effects, the sound of each Part is sent to the
effect according to the Effect Send Level for each Part. The processed sound (referred to as “wet”) is sent
back to the mixer according to the Return Level, and output—after being mixed with the unprocessed
“dry” sound. This instrument is equipped with Variation and Reverb as System Effects. In addition, you can
set the Send Level from Variation to Reverb. This parameter is used to apply Reverb to the signals output
from the Variation. You can get a natural effect by applying Reverb depth to the Variation sound with the
same level as that of the dry sound.
Insertion Effects can be applied individually to each of specified parts before merging signals of all parts.
It should be used for sounds for which you want to drastically change the character. You can set different
Effect types to the Insertion Effects A and B for each Part. These settings can be made from Part Edit
[Effect] (page 75, page 136, page 150).
This synthesizer features 13 sets of Insertion Effects. They can be applied to Parts1–8 and four of the Parts
9–16 and A/D Input Part.
This block applies effects to the final stereo output signal of the entire sound. Multiple Effect types are
available.
Element EQ is applied to each Element of the Normal Part (AWM2) and each key of the Drum Part. You can
specify one of three different EQ shapes, including shelving and peaking.
NOTE Element EQ does not affect the Input signals from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
This EQ is applied to a Part before and after the Insertion Effect.
Master EQ is applied to the final (post-effect), overall sound of the instrument. In this EQ, all five bands can
be set to peaking, with shelving being available also for the lowest and highest bands.
System Effects—Variation and Reverb
Insertion Effects
Master Effect
Element EQ
Part EQ
Master EQ
Part
3-band
parametric EQ
2-band
parametric EQ
Insertion Effect
Part EQ Part EQ
MODX Reference Manual
20
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Effect connection
Each EQ and Insertion Effect applied to each
Part
Variation and Reverb related parameters
Setting: Part Edit [Effect] [Routing] (page 75, page 136,
page 150)
Common/Audio Edit [Effect] [Routing] (page 169)
Master Effect related parameters
Setting: Common/Audio Edit [Effect] [Master FX]
(page 172)
Master EQ related parameters
Setting: Common/Audio Edit [Effect] [Master EQ]
(page 173)
NOTE Regarding the audio input signal from the A/D INPUT [L/
MONO]/[R] jacks, the effect is set in Common/Audio Edit
[Audio In].
About the Vocoder Effect
MODX features a Vocoder effect. Vocoder is a distinctive, “robot voice” effect which extracts the
characteristic of the microphone sound and adds it to the sound via your keyboard performance. The
human voice consists of sounds generated from the vocal cords, and filtered by the throat, nose and
mouth. These resonant sections have specific frequency characteristics and they function effectively as a
filter, creating many formants (harmonic content). The Vocoder effect extracts the filter characteristics of
the voice from the microphone input and recreates the vocal formants by the use of multiple band pass
filters. The machine-like ‘robot’ voice is created by passing the pitched sounds of musical instruments
(such as a synthesizer sound) through the filters.
About Effect categories, Effect types, and Effect parameters
For information regarding the effect categories of this instrument and the effect types contained in
their categories, see the “Effect Type List” in the Data List PDF document. For information on the
effect parameters which can be set in the each effect type, see the “Effect Parameter List” in the Data
List PDF document. For information on the descriptions of each effect category, each effect type, and
each effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameters Manual PDF document.
About Preset settings
Preset settings for parameters of each effect type are provided as templates and can be selected in
the Effect Type selection display. To get a desired effect sound, try first selecting one of the Presets
close to your imagined sound, then change the parameters as necessary. Preset settings can be
determined by setting “Preset” in each effect parameter display. For information on each effect type,
see the Data List PDF document.
Performance
Part
Part EQ
Insertion A/B
Send Level
Variation
Reverb
Variation
to Reverb
System Effect
Return Level
Master
Effect
Master EQ
Mic Input or
Part Output
Part Output
(Keyboard
Performance)
Extracting the characteristic
of the input sound
Creating formants
Vocoder
Robot-like
voice
MODX Reference Manual
21
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Envelope Follower Block
Envelope Follower is a function for detecting the envelope of the input signal waveform and modifying
sounds dynamically. This function allows you to control not only Part outputs but also input signals from
external devices connected to the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
The Input source of each Envelope Follower is fixed such as Part 1 for EnvFollower 1, Part 2 for
EnvFollower 2, and the Audio Part for EnvFollower AD. However, the signal output from each Envelope
Follower can be another “input source” for any desired destination such as each Part or even the entire
Performance. For example, you can modify the sound of Part 2 by using the Envelope Follower for Part 1
(EnvFollower 1) as the “Source.” The Envelope Follower as the “Source” and the target parameter to be
controlled by the Envelope Follower (which is called “Destination”) are set in the Control Assign display
(page 100).
[EDIT] Common/Audio Edit [Audio In] [Routing] “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower AD)
[EDIT] Common/Audio Edit [Effect] [Routing] “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower MST)
[EDIT] Part selection Element/Operator [Common] [Effect] [Routing] “Envelope Follower”
(EnvFollower 1–16)
EnvFollower 1 EnvFollower 2 EnvFollower MST
EnvFollower AD
Input signal to Envelope Follower (Fixed)
Output signal from Envelope Follower (The Destination is flexible)
Each Envelope Follower
Part 1 Part 2
Entire
Performance
(sixteen Parts and
Audio Part)
Audio Part
Each Input source for Envelope Follower
Selected Envelope Follower
Signal flow of
Envelope Follower
Input sources for
Envelope Follower
MODX Reference Manual
22
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Controller Block
This block consists of the keyboard, Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels, Assignable Switches, Knobs,
Control Sliders and Super Knob. By operating these controllers, you can transmit MIDI messages to the
tone generator block to play and modify sounds, or to the DAW software to further control the sounds.
Keyboard
The keyboard transmits the note on/off messages to the Tone Generator Block (for sounding) and
Sequencer Block (for recording). You can change the note range of the keyboard in octaves by using the
OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons, transpose the notes by using the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons while holding down the
[SHIFT] button, and set how the actual velocity is generated according to the strength with which you play
notes.
Pitch Bend wheel
Use the Pitch Bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from
you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard.
Roll the wheel upward/downward to bend the pitch upward/downward.
This wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch
when released. The Pitch Bend Range setting can be changed in Part
Edit [Part Settings] [Pitch] (page 68). Functions other than Pitch
Bend can be assigned to the Pitch Bend wheel in the Part Edit
[Mod/Control] [Control Assign] (page 100, page 153).
Modulation wheel
Even though the Modulation wheel is conventionally used to apply
vibrato to the sound, many of the preset Performances have other
functions and effects assigned to the wheel.
The more you move this wheel up, the greater the effect that is applied
to the sound. To avoid accidentally applying effects to the current
Performance, make sure the Modulation wheel is set to minimum
before you start playing. Various functions can be assigned to the
Modulation wheel in Part Edit [Mod/Control] [Control Assign]
(page 100, page 153).
Assignable Switches
According to the XA (Expanded Articulation) Control settings (page 6) in Element Edit [Osc/Tune]
(page 107), you can call up specific Elements of the current Part by pressing each of these buttons during
your keyboard performance. You can select how the on/off status of these buttons is switched in Common/
Audio Edit [General] (page 159). Furthermore, you can assign various functions (other than calling up
specific Elements) to these buttons in Part Edit [Mod/Control] [Control Assign] (page 100, page 153).
Knobs and Control Sliders
These knobs and sliders let you change various aspects of the Part’s sound in real time—while you play.
For instructions on using the knobs and control sliders, see the Owner’s Manual. For instructions on using
the Knobs 1–4 (5–8), see “Quick Edit” (page 35).
Super Knob
The Super Knob lets you simultaneously control the parameters common to all Parts (Assign 1–8) which
are assigned to the eight knobs. For instructions on using the Super Knob, see the Owner’s Manual. For
the editable setting values for the Super Knob, see the Super Knob display (page 45). Also, for instructions
on setting the Assign 1–8 controls, see the Control Assign display (page 166) for the Common/Audio Edit.
MODX Reference Manual
23
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Internal Memory
The MODX creates a variety of different kinds of data, including Performances, Live Sets, and Songs. This
section describes how to maintain the various types of data and use the memory devices/media for storing
them.
Preset Memory
Preset Memory is memory designed specifically for reading out data such as Preset Performance,
Arpeggio, and Audition Phrase. You cannot overwrite the data in Preset Memory.
Edit buffer
The edit buffer is the memory location for edited data of these types: Performance, Live Set, and Song.
Although the edit buffer is designed specifically for data writing and data reading, the data contained in
the edit buffer is lost when the power is turned off. You should always store edited data to User memory
before editing new performance or before turning off the power. Data other than Performance and Motion
Sequence are automatically stored.
User memory
User data edited in the Edit buffer and utility settings for the entire system are stored in the dedicated area
in the User memory. Up to eight Library files (.X8L) read from the USB flash drive are loaded in the
dedicated area in the User memory.
This is read-write memory and the data will be kept even after the power is turned off.
Internal Memory
Recall
Buffer
Excluding
Master and
Utility settings
Preset Memory
Preset Performance
Arpeggio
Motion Sequence
Audition Phrase
•Waveform
•Live Set
•Curve
Micro Tuning
Edit Buffer
Performance Edit
Motion Sequence Edit
User Curve Edit
Live Set Edit
User Micro Tuning Edit
•User Waveform Edit
Utility
Quick Setup
Song
User Memory
For User
User Performance
User Arpeggio
User Motion Sequence
•User Curve
•User Live Set
User Micro Tuning
•User Waveform
•Utility
Quick Setup
User Audition Phrase
Store (executed by
using store button)
For Library
Song
Audio Record/Playback
Data communication
between this synthesizer
and an external device
Internal data communication
MIDI instrument or computer
DAW software
Bulk Dump
Load/Save
USB flash drive
MOTIF XF format
File extensions “.X3A,” “.X3V,
.X3G,” and “.X3W”
MOTIF XS format
File extensions “.X0A,” “.X0V,
.X0G,” and “.X0W”
MOXF format
File extensions “.X6A,” “.X6V,
.X6G,” and “.X6W”
File extension “.X8U”
MONTAGE format
File extension “.X7U”
File extensions “.MID”
File extensions “.WAV”
File extensions “.WAV” “.AIF”
Compare
Buffer
Excluding
Master and
Utility settings
File extension “.X8A
File extensions “.X8L
MONTAGE format
File extension “.X7L
MODX Reference Manual
24
Basic Structure
Functional blocks
Tone Generator block
A/D Input block
Sequencer block
Arpeggio block
Motion Sequencer block
Effect block
Envelope Follower block
Controller block
Internal Memory
Reference
Display (touch panel) config.
Performance Play (Home)
Motion Control
Mixing
Scene
Play/Rec
Normal Part (AWM) Edit
Drum Part Edit
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common/Audio Edit
Category Search
Utility
Live Set
iPhone/iPad connection
Recall buffer and Compare buffer
If you’ve selected another Performance without storing the one you were editing, you can recall your
original edits, since the edit buffer’s contents are stored on backup memory, called the Recall buffer. Also,
the instrument has a Compare buffer in which the sound settings prior to editing will temporarily be
reinstated for comparison purposes. You can switch between the just-edited sound and its unedited
condition, and hear how your edits affect the sound. Both of these are read-write memory types. However,
you should make sure to store the sequence data before turning off the power, because any sequence
data you’ve created will be lost when the power is turned off. For instructions on using the Compare
function, see the Owner’s Manual.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Display (touch panel)
25
Reference
Reference
Display (touch panel) configuration
This section explains the navigation bar which is common to all types of displays.
HOME icon
Moves to the Performance Play display (page 27).
EXIT icon
Functions same as the [EXIT] button on the panel. Press this icon to exit from the current display and
return to the previous level in the hierarchy.
[INFORMATION] area
Displays helpful information, including the currently selected display name.
EFFECT icon
Touch the icon to call up the Effect Switch display (page 209). The icon turns off when any of the Effect
blocks (Insertion, System or Master) is off.
QUICK SETUP icon
Displays the settings of Local Control ON/OFF and MIDI IN/OUT.
The keyboard-shaped icon lights up when Local Control is set to ON and turns off when Local Control
is set to OFF.
When MIDI is set as the MIDI IN/OUT setting, a MIDI connector-shaped icon appears. When USB is set
as the MIDI IN/OUT setting, a USB connector-shaped icon appears. Touch the desired icon to call up
the corresponding Quick Setup display (page 188).
TEMPO SETTINGS icon
Displays the tempo of the currently selected Performance. Touch the icon to call up the Tempo Settings
display (page 207).
LIVE SET icon
Touch the icon to call up the Live Set display (page 212).
UTILITY icon
Touch the icon to call up the last opened display among the Utility displays.
Navigation bar
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Display (touch panel)
26
Reference
Pop-up List
Displays setting values for parameters. When the setting values are displayed in multiple pages, you
will need to use the Scroll buttons to scroll through the pages or the Display All button to display all of
the setting values.
Scroll buttons
Display All
Display All button
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
27
Reference
Performance Play (Home)
From the Performance Play display you can play a selected Performance and edit some of the
Performance-related settings.
Performance name
Indicates the currently selected Performance name. Touching the parameter calls up the menu for
Category Search, Edit, and Recall.
NOTE Once you edit any parameter in the selected Performance, a blue flag icon appears at right in the
Performance Name.
Part indicator
When the cursor is on the Performance name or on Parts 1–8, this indicates whether Parts 9–16 are
used or not.
When the cursor is on Parts 9–16, it indicates whether Parts 1–8 are used or not. If Parts 9–16 are not in
use, this indicator is not shown.
Flag
Indicates the tone generation attributes of the currently selected Performance. (See chart below.)
Knob functions
Indicates the functions currently assigned to the Knobs 1–4 (5–8).
Home
Operation
Press the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button
or
Touch the [HOME] icon
Flag Definition
AWM2 Performance comprised only of AWM2 Parts
FM-X Performance comprised only of FM-X Parts
AWM2+FM-X Performance comprised of both AWM2 and FM-X Parts
MC Performance featuring Motion Control
SSS Performance featuring Seamless Sound Switching
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
28
Reference
Type/Name Switch
Switches between the displays of Part Type/Category and Part Name.
Settings: Type, Name
Part Types / Part Names
Indicates the Part types and categories or the Part names.
Touching the parameter calls up the menu for Category Search, Edit, and Copy.
To add another Part, touch the “+” icon.
Common Motion Sequencer switch
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer of the Common/AD Parts is on or off. When all Lane
switches of the Common/AD Parts are off, this switch is not shown.
Settings: Off, On
Part Arpeggio On/Off switch
Determines whether the Arpeggio of each Part is on or off. When the Arpeggio and the Arpeggio Hold
are set to on, “Arp Hold On” is displayed.
NOTE You can turn the Arpeggio Hold for the Part on or off by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and
touching this switch.
Settings:
Off, On
Part Motion Sequencer switch
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer of each Part is on or off. When all Lane switches of the Part
are off, this switch is not shown.
Settings: Off, On
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Part’s note range. For example, setting a Note Limit of
“C5–C4” lets you hear the Part by playing notes in the two ranges of C-2 to C4 and C5 to G8; notes
played between C4 and C5 have no sound. For details about the Note Limit setting, see the Owner’s
Manual.
Settings: C -2 – G8
Keyboard Control switch
Determines whether the Keyboard Control for each Part is on or off. When this switch is set to off, the
Part will not sound even you play the keyboard (unless the Part is selected).
Settings: Off, On
Switching Mute on/off for Parts
Determines whether the Mute for each Part is on or off.
Settings: Off, On
Switching Solo on/off for Parts
Determines whether the Solo for each Part is on or off.
Settings: Off, On
Volume of Parts
Determines the Volume for the Part.
Settings: 0–127
NOTE When the triangle marks for the Volume are shown in blue, the volume change created by the control sliders
is not reflected to the overall sound. When the value changed by the control slider reaches the value shown
as a blue triangle, the triangle mark changes to white, and the volume change created by the control sliders
are reflected to the overall sound.
Meter
Indicates the audio output level of the Part.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
29
Reference
View
Determines whether the detailed information of each Part is displayed (On) or not displayed (Off). The
displayed information differs depending on the cursor position or the Control function settings.
Settings: Off, On
NOTE When the cursor is on the Performance name on the Performance Play (Home) display, you can also switch
the information views by pressing the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button.
This section explains when “View” is turned on.
Element view
This appears only when the currently selected Part is the Normal Part (AWM2), and Motion Control
Overview Slider Function [Elem/Op Control] button is ON.
Element SW (Element switch)
Determines whether each Element is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Element Level
Determines the output level of the Element.
Settings: 0–127
Element SwitchElement Level
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
30
Reference
Drum Key view
This appears only when the currently selected Part is the Drum Part, and Motion Control Overview
Slider Function [Elem/Op Control] button is ON.
Drum Key Level
Determines the output level of the Drum Key.
Settings: 0–127
Drum Key Level
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
31
Reference
Algorithm view
This appears only when the currently selected Part is the Normal Part (FM-X), and Motion Control
Overview Slider Function [Elem/Op Control] button is ON.
Algorithm (Algorithm Number)
Changes Algorithms.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
NOTE Tapping the Algorithm image calls up the Algorithm Search display.
Feedback (Feedback Level)
Waveforms can be changed by feeding some of the signal generated by an operator back through that
operator. This allows you to set the feedback level.
Settings: 0–7
Operator Level
Determines the output level of the Operator.
Settings: 0–99
Operator Level
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
32
Reference
Part Note view
This appears only when the [PART CONTROL] button is turned on or the cursor is on the Note Limit. This is
useful for checking the Layer/Split settings among Parts.
Velocity – Note view
This appears only when the cursor is on any velocity limit of Parts. This is useful for setting Velocity split
among Parts.
Note Limit
Velocity Limit
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
33
Reference
Motion Control
From the Motion Control display you can edit all Motion Control settings, such as general sound settings,
Arpeggio, and the Motion Sequencer of the currently selected Performance.
The Motion Control section contains the following various displays.
Overview
•Quick Edit
•Arpeggio
Motion Sequencer
Super Knob
•Knob Auto
The Overview display indicates the illustration of the connection between Controllers and Parts. You can
confirm the current settings here.
NOTE Lines between the most recently used controller and Part are shown in bold.
Part
Indicates the currently selected Part. To confirm a Part’s connections, select the Part here.
Settings: Common, Part 1–16
Edit Common Control Settings/Edit Part Control Settings
Calls up the Control Assign display for the selected Part. For “Common,” see page 166. For Part 1–16, see
page 100.
Slider Function
Switches among Performance Control, Part Control, and Element/Operator Control.
Settings: Part Control, Elem/Op Control
NOTE You can store Slider function operations as Performance data.
Motion Control
Overview
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Overview]
or
[SHIFT] + [PERFORMANCE (HOME)]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
34
Reference
Controller
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Controller” and Part is shown.
The “Controller” here refers to:
Pitch Bend wheel
Modulation wheel
[ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons (Assignable switches 1 and 2)
[MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion sequencer Hold) button
[MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion sequencer trigger) button
Settings: Off, On
Assignable
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Assignable” and Part is shown.
The “Assignable” here refers to:
Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8)
Settings: Off, On
Fader
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Fader” and Part is shown.
The “Fader” here refers to:
Control sliders 1–4 (5–8 / 9–12 / 13–16)
Settings: Off, On
Super Knob
Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Super Knob” and Part is shown.
The “Super Knob” here refers to:
Super Knob
Settings: Off, On
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
35
Reference
From the Quick Edit display you can make general sound settings. You can select whether the settings are
commonly applied to all Parts or to only one selected Part.
Part
Indicates the currently selected Part. Select the Part you want to use Quick Edit with here.
Settings: Common, Part 1–16
When “Part” is set to “Common”
You can edit the parameters commonly applied to all Parts.
Performance Name
Enters the desired name for the Performance. Performance names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time)
Determines the speed of filter variation from the time a note is played until the maximum initial level of
the Cutoff Frequency is reached. This parameter determines the offset value of the FEG (page 118) for
the Element/Operator Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time)
Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. This
parameter determines the offset value of the FEG parameter (page 118) for the Element/Operator
Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
FEG Rel (FEG Release Time)
Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released.
This parameter determines the offset value for the FEG parameter (page 118) of the Element/Operator
Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
Edit Master EQ
Calls up the Master EQ display (page 173) for Common/Audio Edit.
Quick Edit
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Quick Edit]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
36
Reference
Edit All Arp (Edit All Arpeggio)
Calls up the Arpeggio display (page 41) for Motion Control.
Edit Common MS (Edit Common Motion Sequencer)
Calls up the Motion Sequencer Lane display (page 165) for Common/Audio Edit.
Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the Cutoff Frequency for the Filter, when the Low Pass Filter is selected, for example, the
larger the value the brighter the decay. This parameter determines the offset value of the Filter Cutoff
Frequency (page 115) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
Resonance
Determines the emphasis given to the Cutoff Frequency. This parameter determines the offset value of
the Filter Resonance (page 116) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
FEG Depth
Determines the range over which the cutoff frequency of the Filter EG changes. This parameter
determines the offset value of the FEG Depth (page 118) for the Element/Operator Common.
Settings: -64 – +63
Portamento (Portamento Time)
Determines the pitch transition time when Portamento is applied. This parameter is synchronized to the
same parameter for the Common/Audio Edit.
Settings: -64 – +63
Attack (AEG Attack Time)
Determines the speed of attack from the time a key is played until the maximum initial level of the AEG
is reached. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157) for
the Element/Drum Key/Operator.
Settings: -64 – +63
Decay (AEG Decay Time)
Determines how fast the volume falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. This parameter
determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157). for the Element/Drum Key/
Operator
Settings: -64 – +63
Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)
Determines the sustain level at which the volume will continue while a note is held, after the initial attack
and decay. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157) for
the Element/Drum Key/Operator.
Settings: -64 – +63
Release (AEG Release Time)
Determines how fast the volume falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released. This
parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157) for the Element/
Drum Key/Operator.
Settings: -64 – +63
Low Gain (Maser EQ Low Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
37
Reference
Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
High Gain (Master EQ High Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Pan (Performance Pan)
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance. This parameter offsets the same
parameter in the Part Edit setting.
Settings: L63–C (center)–R63
Var Return (Variation Return)
Determines the Return level of the Variation Effect.
Settings: 0–127
Rev Return (Reverb Return)
Determines the Return level of the Reverb Effect.
Settings: 0–127
Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)
Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.
Settings: -120 – +120
Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.
This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer
of the Part is set to “Common.”
By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original
one.
Settings: 50%–400%
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)
Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100 – +100
Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)
Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the
Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100 – +100
Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines
how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting
in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the
step curve shape of the sequence.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to
on for the parameter).
Settings: -100 – +100
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
38
Reference
Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the
degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the
Smoothness setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree
to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
When “Part” is set to Part 1–16
You can edit the parameters for the selected Part.
Part Category Main (Part Main Category)
Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)
Determines the Main Category and Sub Category of the Part.
The categories are keywords representing the general characteristics of the Parts. Selecting the
appropriate category makes it easy to find the desired Part from the huge variety of Parts available.
There are 17 Main Categories which indicate types of instruments. There are up to nine Sub Categories
for each Main Category, indicating more detailed types of instruments.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
39
Reference
Part Name
Enters the desired name for the Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
The parameters below are same as the ones when “Part” is set to “Common” (page 35).
FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time)
FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time)
FEG Rel (FEG Release Time)
•Cutoff
Resonance
FEG Depth
Portamento (Portamento Time)
The setting values differ from the ones which “Part” is set to “Common.”
Settings: 0–127
Attack (AEG Attack Time)
Decay (AEG Decay Time)
Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)
Release (AEG Release Time)
FEG Sus (FEG Sustain Level)
Determines the FEG Sustain Level for the Part. This is the offset value for the FEG Decay2 Level of the
Element/Operator Common (page 118).
Settings: -64 – +63
Edit Part EQ
Calls up the Part EQ display (page 78) for Part Edit.
Edit Part Arp (Edit Part Arpeggio)
Calls up the Arpeggio display (page 82) for Part Edit.
Edit Part MS (Edit Part Motion Sequencer)
Calls up the Motion Sequencer Lane display (page 91) for Part Edit.
EQ Low Gain (3 band EQ Low Gain)
Determines the level gain for the Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ Mid Freq (3 band EQ Mid Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Mid band.
Settings: 139.7Hz–10.1kHz
EQ Mid Gain (3 band EQ Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain for the Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ Mid Q (3 band EQ Mid Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Mid band.
Settings: 0.7–10.3
EQ High Gain (3 band EQ Hi Gain)
Determines the level gain of the High band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.
Settings: L63–C (center)–R63
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent to the Variation effect.
Settings: 0–127
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
40
Reference
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent to the Reverb effect.
Settings: 0–127
Part Clock Swing (Part Swing)
Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.
+1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.
-1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.
0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.
Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and
bounce.
Settings: -120 – +120
Part Clock Unit (Part Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Part.
Settings: 50%–400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Part Arp Gate Time (Part Arpeggio Gate Time)
Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value.
This is the offset value for the Gate Time Rate (page 86) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0%–200%
Part Arp Velocity (Part Arpeggio Velocity Rate)
Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value.
This is the offset value for the Velocity Rate (page 85) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0%–200%
Part Motion Seq Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude (page 93) of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Amplitude when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
Part Motion Seq Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq “Step Curve Parameter” (page 94) when “MS FX” is set
to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter.
Settings: -100 – +100
Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Smoothness (page 93) when “MS FX” is set to on for the
Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
Part Motion Seq Random
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. “Random” is the degree to
which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Settings: 0–127
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
41
Reference
From the Arpeggio display you can set Arpeggio-related parameters for multiple Parts.
Touching the Arpeggio Type name on this display (or pressing the [CATEGORY] button on the panel) calls
up a menu. In the displayed menu, touch [Search] to call up the Arpeggio Category Search display and
touch [Number] to determine the Arpeggio Type by specifying the Arpeggio Number.
Part 9-16 / Part 1-8
Switches between the displays of Parts 9–16 or the Parts 1–8. In case of the picture above, touch the “Part
9-16” to display the Arpeggio Types for the “Part 9-16.”
Settings: Part 9-16 / Part 1-8
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Determines whether the Arpeggio is on or off for the entire Performance. This setting is applied to the [ARP
ON/OFF] button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)
Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the
Arpeggio of multiple Parts is playing back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you
trigger it. The number indicates the clock.
Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Arp (Part Arpeggio Switch)
Determines whether the Arpeggio for each Part is on or off.
Settings: Off, On
Arp Select (Arpeggio Select)
Determines the Arpeggio Types.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Arpeggios. For details, see
“Copying or Exchanging Arpeggios” (page 86).
Settings: 1–8
Arpeggio
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Arpeggio]
Arpeggio Type
View
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
42
Reference
View
Determines which information regarding Arpeggio Type is displayed.
Settings: Category, Number, Range
When “View” is set to “Category”
Category (Arpeggio Category)
Settings: See the Arpeggio category list (page 11).
Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)
Settings: See the Arpeggio sub category list (page 11).
Name (Arpeggio Name)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
When “View” is set to “Number”
Bank (Arpeggio Bank)
Settings: Preset, User, Library 1–8
Number (Arpeggio Number)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Name (Arpeggio Name)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
43
Reference
When “View” is set to “Range”
Name (Arpeggio Name)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit)
Determines the lowest and highest velocity which can trigger Arpeggio playback. For details on
settings of Velocity Limit, see the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: 1–127
Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit)
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. For details on settings of Note
Limit, see the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: C -2 – G8
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
44
Reference
From the Motion Sequencer display you can set parameters related to Motion Sequencer for multiple Parts.
MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer is on or off for the entire Performance. This setting is applied to
the [MS ON/OFF] button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On
Active (Active Motion Sequencer)
Indicates the number of the active Lane. The number after slash indicates the maximum number of the
Lanes which can be activated simultaneously.
PartSW (Motion Sequencer Part Switch)
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer is on or off for each Part/all Parts.
Settings: Off, On
Lane Switch
Determines whether each Lane is on or off. You can set up to four Lanes corresponding to the Motion
Sequencer function for one Part. Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire
Performance.
Settings: Off, On
Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select)
Determines the Motion Sequence Type.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Settings: 1–8
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Motion Seq]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
45
Reference
From the Super Knob display you can set parameters controlled by the Super knob.
MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)
Turns the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on/off. This setting is applied to the [MS ON/OFF]
button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On
Super Knob MS (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Switch)
Turns the Motion Sequencer applied to the Super Knob on/off.
Settings: Off, On
Edit Super Knob Motion Seq
Shows the Knob Auto display, in which you can set the Motion Sequencer for the Super Knob.
Edit Super Knob
Shows the Control Assign display for Common/Audio Edit, in which you can set the parameters to be
controlled by the Super Knob.
LED Pattern (Super Knob LED Pattern)
Determines the lighting pattern of the Super Knob.
Settings: Type 1, Type 2-1, Type 2-2, Type 3-1, Type 3-2, Type 4-1, Type 4-2, Type 5-1, Type 5-2, Type 6, Type 7-1, Type 7-2,
Type 8-1, Type 8-2, Type 9, Type 10, Type 11, Off
Super Knob (Super Knob Value)
Determines the value of the Super Knob.
Settings: 0–127
Super Knob Link
Turns the link between the Assignable Knob and the Super Knob on/off. When this is set to off, the function
value assigned to the corresponding knob does not change even if the Super Knob is controlled.
Settings: Off, On
Super Knob
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Super Knob]
Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 1
Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 2
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
46
Reference
Assignable Knob 1–8 Value
Determines the value for the Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8).
Settings: 0–127
Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 1
Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 2
Determines the lowest value (Assignable value 1) and the highest value (Assignable value 2) for the
corresponding Knob.
When you operate the Super Knob, the Assignable Knob value varies within the specified range.
Settings: 0–127
From the Knob Auto display you can set parameters related to Motion Sequencer applied to the Super
Knob (Super Knob Motion Sequencer.) The parameter value of the Super Knob can be automatically
controlled by the Motion Sequencer.
You can set only one Lane for the Super Knob Motion Sequencer.
NOTE Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. However, the Lane set for the Super
Knob is not included in the eight referred to here.
MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)
Turns the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on/off. This setting is applied to the [MS ON/OFF]
button on the panel.
Settings: Off, On
Super Knob MS (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Switch)
Turns the Motion Sequencer applied to the Super Knob on/off.
Settings: Off, On
MS FX (Super Knob Motion Sequencer FX Receive)
Determines whether or not the Motion Sequencer is affected by the knob operation when “ARP/MS” is
selected with the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button.
Settings: Off, On
Knob Auto
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Knob Auto]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
47
Reference
Trigger (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive)
Determines whether the signal from the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button is received or not. When this is
set to on, the Motion Sequence will begin whenever you press the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button.
Settings: Off, On
Sequence Select (Super Knob Motion Sequence Select)
Determines the Motion Sequence Type.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Settings: 1–8
Sync Part (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync Part)
Determines which Part is synchronized with the Super Knob Motion Sequencer. This setting is applied to
the Note On Setting and the Arp/Motion Seq Grid setting for the selected Part.
Settings: Part 1 – Part 16
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
displayed in clocks.
For the Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. This setting is applied to the Part which
is selected as the Sync Part (above).
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Random (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the degree to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Settings: 0–127
Sync (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync)
Determines if the playback of the Motion Sequence applied to the Super Knob is synchronized to the
Tempo, Beat, or Arpeggio of the Performance.
Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp
Off: Super Knob Motion Sequencer plays back according to its own clock and is not synchronized to an external
clock.
Tempo: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Performance tempo.
Beat: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the beat.
Arp: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the 1st beat of the measure of the currently playing
Arpeggio.
Speed (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Speed)
Determines the speed of the playback of the Motion Sequence.
This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is “Off.”
Settings: 0–127
Unit Multiply (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Super Knob Motion Sequencer playback time.
This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is “Off.”
Settings: 50%–6400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Key On Reset (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the playback of the Motion Sequence is stopped when you play the keyboard.
This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is set to something other than
“Arp.”
Also this parameter is not available when “Trigger” is set to “On.”
Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On
Each-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequence from the beginning.
1st-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequencer from the beginning. If you play a
second note while the first is being held, the Sequence continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered
by the first note—in other words, the Sequence only resets if the first note is released before the second is played.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
48
Reference
Loop (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Loop)
Determines whether the Motion Sequence is played only once or repeatedly.
Settings: Off, On
Velocity Limit (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit)
Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values over which the Motion Sequence responds.
Settings: 1–127
Cycle (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Cycle)
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 1–16
Load Sequence
Loads Motion Sequence data in the User Memory. For details about Loading, see “Load” (page 198).
Edit Sequence
Calls up the Motion Sequence Setting display. You can create a custom Sequence consisting of up to
sixteen steps.
Cycle (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Cycle)
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 1–16
Amplitude (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
Settings: 0–127
Smooth (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the smoothness of the time change of the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 0–127
Sequence Select (Super Knob Motion Sequence Select)
Determines the Motion Sequence Type.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Settings: 1–8
Motion Seq Step Value
Motion Seq Step Type
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
49
Reference
Polarity (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Polarity)
Determines the Sequence Polarity.
Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar
Unipolar: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction from a base parameter value according to the Sequence.
Bipolar: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.
Motion Seq Step Value (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Value)
Determines the Step Value for the Motion Sequence. You can control the Step Value 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 or 13–
16 by the Control Sliders 1–4 depending on the cursor position on the display.
Settings: 0–127
Motion Seq Step Type (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Type)
Determines each Step Type of the Motion Sequence. You can switch between the Step Types A and B for
the Step 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 or 13–16 by the SCENE [1/5]–[4/8] buttons depending on the cursor position on
the display.
Settings: A, B
Pulse A / Pulse B (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Type)
Determines the Curve Type of the parameter for each of “Pulse A” and “Pulse B.” “Motion Seq Step Type”
described above determines which curve set here is used for each step. The vertical axis indicates the
step value and the horizontal axis indicates the time. For detail about the curve shapes, see page 102.
Settings: For Preset Bank: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle,
Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold
For User Bank: User 1–32
When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1–8
Direction (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Direction)
Determines the Direction of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: Forward, Reverse
Prm1 / Prm2 (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Parameter)
Adjusts the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Also the range of available parameter
values differs depending on the Curve Type.
Control (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Shape Control Switch)
Determines whether or not to control the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence by operating
Knobs. This parameter is displayed only when “MS FX” is set to on. Also this parameter is not available
depending on the Curve Type.
Settings: Off, On
Store Sequence
Stores the edited Motion Sequence data. For details about storing data, see “Store/Save” (page 201).
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
50
Reference
Mixing
From the Mixing display you can adjust the volume and effect settings for each Part.
NOTE The settings in the Mixing display are stored as part of Performance data.
Part 1-16 / Audio Switch
Switches between the displays of the Mixing settings for Parts 1–16 or the Mixing settings for Parts 1–8, the
Audio Part, the Digital Part, and the Master.
Settings: Part 1-16, Audio
Mixing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Mixing]
Part 1-16 / Audio Switch
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
51
Reference
When one of Parts 1–16 is selected
Determines the Mixing setting for each Part 1–16.
Part Category
Indicates the Main category for the Part.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Function Switch
Determines the Mute/Solo setting and the Keyboard Control settings for the selected Part 1–16.
Settings: Mute/Solo, Kbd Ctrl
When “Mute/Solo” is selected
Mute/Solo (Part Mute/Solo)
Turns the Mute/Solo function on/off for the selected Part 1–16. When the function is on, this button
lights.
Settings: Off, On
Function Switch
Part Category
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
52
Reference
When “Kbd Ctrl” is selected
Kbd Ctrl (Keyboard Control)
Turns the Keyboard Control function on/off for the selected Part 1–8. When the function is on, this
button lights.
Settings: Off, On
3-band/2-band Switch (3-band EQ/2-band EQ Switch)
Switches between the displays of the 3-band EQ or the 2-band EQ for Parts 1–16.
Settings: 3-band, 2-band
EQ (Equalizer)
Displays the 3-band EQ or the 2-band EQ depending on the “3-band/2-band” setting.
Touching the button calls up the menu of Part EQ Edit.
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Adjusts the Reverb send level of the selected Part 1–16.
Settings: 0–127
3-band/2-band Switch
EQ
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
53
Reference
Var Send (Variation Send)
Adjusts the Variation send level of the selected Part 1–16.
Settings: 0–127
Dry Level
Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the selected Part 1–16.
Settings: 0–127
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part 1–16.
Settings: L63–C–R63
Volume (Part Volume)
Determines the output level of the selected Part 1–16.
Settings: 0–127
When “AD” Audio Part or “Digi” Digital Part is selected
Determines the Mixing setting of the Audio/Digital Part.
A/D Part EQ (Audio Part Equalizer)
Displays the 2-band parametric EQ.
Touching the button calls up the menu of Common/Audio Part EQ Edit.
A/D Part Rev Send (Audio Part Reverb Send)
Digital Part Rev Send (Digital Part Reverb Send)
Adjusts the Reverb send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0–127
A/D Part Var Send (Audio Part Variation Send)
Digital Part Var Send (Digital Part Variation Send)
Adjusts the Variation send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0–127
A/D Part Dry Level (Audio Part Dry Level)
Digital Part Dry Level
Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0–127
A/D Part EQ
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
54
Reference
A/D Part Pan (Audio Part Pan)
Digital Part Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: L63–C–R63
A/D Volume (Audio Part Volume)
Digital Part Volume
Determines the output level of the Audio Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0–127
When “Mst” (Master Part) is selected
Determines the Master Mixing settings.
Master EQ (Master Equalizer)
Displays the 5-band parametric EQ.
Touching the button calls up the menu of Master EQ Edit.
Rev Return (Reverb Return)
Var Return (Variation Return)
Determines the return level of the Reverb/Variation effect.
Settings: 0–127
Pan (Performance Pan)
Determines the stereo pan position of the entire Performance. This parameter offsets the same
parameter in the Part Edit setting.
Settings: L63–C–R63
Performance Volume
Determines the output level of the entire Performance.
Settings: 0–127
Master EQ
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
55
Reference
Scene
With the Scene function, you can store all parameter settings such as Arpeggio type, Motion Sequencer
type, and the Part parameter values together as a “Scene.” There are eight Scenes and you can select
them by pressing the [SCENE] button. From the Scene display you can edit parameters related to the
Scene function.
When [Memory] is turned on for the function, the Motion Sequencer type, or the Arpeggio type, the
corresponding function information is automatically memorized to the currently selected [SCENE] button.
For information on how to use the Scene function, see the Owner’s Manual.
NOTE You can also change Scene Settings from any other operation displays. To do this, set the parameter value
available for the Scene by operating the corresponding Knob or Control Slider, and press one of the SCENE [1/
5]–[4/8] buttons while holding down the [SHIFT] button. Scenes 1 to 8 are assigned to each button.
Scene Select
Switches Scenes by selecting tabs. This setting is applied to the SCENE [1/5]–[4/8] buttons on the panel.
Settings: 1–8
Memory (Memorize Switch)
Determines whether or not to memorize each parameter (such as Arpeggio, Motion Sequencer, Super
Knob, Mixing, Amplitude EG, and Arp/MS FX) as a Scene. When this is off, the parameter is not displayed
even when the corresponding tab is selected.
Settings: Off, On
When the “Arp/Motion Seq” tab is selected and both Memorize Switches for “Arp” and
“Motion Seq” are set to ON
Motion Seq Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)
Determines whether Motion Sequencer is set to ON or OFF for the entire Performance in the selected
Scene.
Settings: Off, On
Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select)
Determines the Motion Sequence type for the selected Scene.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Settings: 1–8
Scene
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Scene]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
56
Reference
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Determines whether Arpeggio is set to ON or OFF for the entire Performance in the selected Scene.
Settings: Off, On
Arp Select (Arpeggio Select)
Determines the Arpeggio type for the selected Scene.
Settings: 1–8
When the “Super Knob” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set
to ON
Super Knob (Super Knob Value)
Determines the Super Knob Value for the selected Scene.
Settings: 0–127
When the “Mixing 1” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to
ON
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Adjusts the Reverb Send level of each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0–127
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
57
Reference
Var Send (Variation Send)
Adjusts the Variation Send level of each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0–127
Dry Level
Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0–127
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: L63–C–R63
Volume (Part Volume)
Determines the volumes of each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0–127
When the “Mixing 2” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to
ON
Cutoff
Determines the Cutoff frequency for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
Res (Resonance)
Determines the resonance for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
FEG Depth
Determines the Filter Envelope Generator depth (amount of Cutoff Frequency) for each Part in the
selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
Mute (Part Mute)
Determines the Mute setting for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: Off, On
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
58
Reference
When the “AEG” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to ON
Attack (AEG Attack Time)
Determines the AEG Attack Time for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
Decay (AEG Decay Time)
Determines the AEG Decay Time for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
Sustain (AEG Sustain Level)
Determines the AEG Sustain Level for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
Release (AEG Release Time)
Determines the AEG Release Time for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: -64 – +63
When the “Arp/MS FX 1” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set
to ON
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
59
Reference
Swing
Determines the Swing setting of Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene.
For details about Swing, see “Quick Edit” (page 40).
Settings: -120 – +120
Unit (Part Unit Multiply)
Determines the Unit Multiply setting of Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected
Scene.
Settings: 50%–400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Gate Time (Gate Time Rate)
Determines the Gate Time Rate of Arpeggio for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0%–200%
Velocity (Velocity Rate)
Determines the Velocity Rate of Arpeggio for each Part in the selected Scene.
Settings: 0%–200%
When the “Arp/MS FX 2” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set
to ON
Amp (Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about
Amplitude, see “Quick Edit” (page 37).
Settings: -64 – +63
Shape (Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details
about Pulse Shape, see “Quick Edit” (page 37).
Settings: -100 – +100
Smooth (Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the Smoothness of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details
about Smoothness, see “Quick Edit” (page 38).
Settings: -64 – +63
Random (Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the “Random” of Motion Sequence for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about
Random, see “Quick Edit” (page 38).
Settings: 0–127
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
60
Reference
Play/Rec
You can playback/record MIDI data as Songs on this instrument itself or playback/record your
performance (audio data) on a USB flash drive.
From the MIDI display you can playback/record your keyboard performance with using the selected
Performance to the Song. You can playback/record knob operations, controller operations and Arpeggio
playback as well as your keyboard playing to the specified Track as MIDI events.
Playback and Playback Standby
Song Name
Indicates the selected Song name. Touching the Song Name calls up a menu for selecting Load, Rename,
New Song and User Arpeggio.
Performance Name
Indicates the selected Performance Name.
Click Settings
Shows the Tempo settings display.
Time Signature
Indicates the meter of the Song.
Position (Song Position)
Determines the starting position of Recording/Playback. The indicator also shows the current position
during playback.
The measure’s number is in the left cell and the beat number and clocks are in the right cell.
Play/Rec
MIDI
Operation
Press the [ ] (Play) button
or
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [MIDI]
Song Length
Track P lay Swi tc h
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
61
Reference
Tempo
Determines the Song tempo.
Settings: 5–300
NOTE The tempo can be set as follows.
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [UTILITY] [Tempo Settings] (page 207)
Store Song & Perf Settings
Changes the Song tempo, Loop settings, and the Performance called back along with the Song to the
current settings.
This parameter is not available during:
New recording (No previously recorded Song data.)
Playback
Recording Standby
Recording
Loop
Determines whether the Song plays through a single time or continuously. When this is set to on, the Song
is repeatedly played back between the “Loop Start” and “Loop End” points (below).
Settings: Off, On
Loop Start / End
Determines the start position and the end position of Loop playback. The measure number is in the left cell
and the beat number is in the right cell. This is not available when “Loop” is set to off.
Save As .mid File
Calls up the Store/Save display to save the Song as a file.
This button is not available during:
New recording (No previously recorded Song data.)
Playback
Recording Standby
Recording
An external memory such as a USB flash drive is not connected.
Song Length
Indicates the length of the entire sequence.
Track Play Switch
Switches the playback for each track on/off.
Settings: Off, On
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
62
Reference
Record and Record Standby
Time Signature
Determines the meter of the Song.
Settings: 1/16–16/16, 1/8–16/8, 1/4–8/4
Rec Quantize (Record Quantize)
Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest
exact beat. You can use this feature, for example, to improve the timing of a performance recorded in real
time. Record quantize aligns the timing of notes automatically, as you record.
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note), Off
Record Type
Determines the Recording Type. This parameter is not available for the first recording.
Settings: Replace, Overdub, Punch
Replace: You can use this method when you want to overwrite an already recorded Track with new data in real time.
The original data will be erased.
Overdub: You can use this method when you want to add more data to a Track that already contains data.
Previously recorded data will be maintained.
Punch: You can use this method when you want to overwrite data to a specified range of a Track that already
contains data. It allows you to overwrite the already recorded data from the starting point to the ending point
(measure/beat) that was specified before recording.
Punch In
Determines the starting point (measure and beat) for recording. This parameter is available only when
“punch” is selected for “Record Type.”
Punch Out
Determines the ending point (measure and beat) for recording. This parameter is available only when
“punch” is selected for “Record Type.”
NOTE For details about the Punch In/Out setting, see the Owner’s Manual.
Undo
The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, restoring the data to
its previous state.
Redo
Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them.
Operation
Press the [ ] (Record) button
or
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [MIDI] [ ] (Record) button
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
63
Reference
Put Track to Arpeggio
This function copies data in the specified measures of a track for creating Arpeggio data. Up to 16 unique
note numbers can be recorded to the Arpeggio track. If more than 16 different note numbers have been
recorded to the MIDI sequence data, the Convert operation reduces the notes in excess of the limit.
Because of this, be careful to record only up to 16 different notes when you create an Arpeggio, especially
when using multiple tracks.
Arp (Arpeggio Number)
Determines the User Arpeggio number. One of the numbers currently not in use is automatically assigned
by default. When a number already in use is selected, the previous Arpeggio data in the selected number
will be overwritten.
Settings: 1–256
Category (Arpeggio Category)
Determines the Category setting (Main Category and Sub Category) for the created Arpeggio data.
Settings: Refer to the Arpeggio Type Category List in the Reference Manual PDF document.
Name (Arpeggio Name)
Determines the User Arpeggio name. The Arpeggio name can contain up to 20 characters.
Song Track
Determines the track of the source Song for each Arpeggio track.
Convert Type
Determines how the MIDI sequence data (of Song tracks) will be converted to Arpeggio data from the
three ways below. This parameter can be set for each track.
Settings: Normal, Fixed, Org Notes
Normal: The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes.
Fixed: Playing any note(s) will trigger the same MIDI sequence data.
Org Notes
(original notes): Basically same as “Fixed” with the exception that the Arpeggio playback notes differ
according to the played chord.
Original Notes Root
Determines the root note when the Convert Type of any track is set to “Org Notes.” This is available only
when any track is set to “Org Notes.”
Settings: C-2 – G8
Operation
[ ] (PLAY) button
or
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [MIDI] Touch the Song Name to call up the menu
[User Arp] in the menu
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
64
Reference
Measure
Determines the range of measures to be copied to the Arpeggio data.
Settings: 001–999
Store As User Arp (Store As User Arpeggio)
Stores as User Arpeggio following all settings made in this display. This is not available when all tracks are
set to off.
From the Audio display you can record your performance on the instrument as WAV format (44.1-kHz,
24-bit, stereo) audio files to a USB flash drive. It is possible to record continuously for up to 74 minutes
(assuming that the USB storage device has sufficient free memory).
Playback and Playback Standby
Audio Name
Indicates the name of the selected Audio file.
Position (Audio Position)
Determines the starting position of Playback. The indicator also shows the current position during
playback.
Audio Volume
Determines the volume of the Audio Playback. This parameter cannot be changed during recording.
Settings: 0–255
Audio Length
Indicates the length of the entire audio data.
Level Meter
Indicates the Audio Input/Output level.
Audio
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [Audio]
Current play position in the
entire audio data
Level meter
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Performance
Home
Motion Control
Overview
Quick Edit
Arpeggio
Motion Seq
Super Knob
Knob Auto
Mixing
Scene
Play / Rec
MIDI
Audio
65
Reference
Record and Record Standby
Recordable (Audio Recordable Time)
Indicates available recording time. This parameter is displayed only during recording standby.
Trigger Level
Determines the method of starting recording. This parameter is displayed only during recording standby.
If you set the trigger level to “manual,” recording will begin whenever you press the [ ] (Play) button.
Alternatively, if you set a value between 1 and 127, recording will begin automatically whenever the [ ]
(Play) button is pressed and the playback volume exceeds that level. The level set here will be indicated
by blue triangles in the level meter. For best results, set this parameter as low as possible to capture the
entire signal, but not so low as to record unwanted noise.
Settings: manual, 1–127
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [Audio] [ ] (Record) button
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
66
Reference
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
A Normal Part (AWM2) (having pitched musical instrument sounds) can consist of up to eight Elements.
An Element is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. There are two types of Normal Part (AWM2) Edit displays:
Element Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Elements; and Element Edit display,
for editing individual Elements.
Element Common Edit (Common)
From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan.
Part Category Main (Part Main Category)
Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)
Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Part Name
Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
Volume (Part Volume)
Determines the output level of the selected Part.
Settings: 0–127
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.
Settings: L63–C–R63
Part Settings
General
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Part Settings]
[General]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
67
Reference
Dry Level
Determines the dry sound level (without effect processing) of the selected Part. This is available only when
“Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Determines which audio output is used for the selected Part.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2...USB7&8, USB1...USB8, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1...8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Mono/Poly
Selects monophonic or polyphonic playback for the selected Part. Monophonic is for single notes only, and
polyphonic is for playing multiple simultaneous notes.
Settings: Mono, Poly
Key Assign (Key Assign Mode)
Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously, and without
corresponding note off messages. For details, refer to the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Settings: Single, Multi
Single: Double or repeated playback of the same note is not possible. The first note will be stopped, then the next
note will be sounded.
Multi: All notes are sounded simultaneously. This allows playback of the same note when it is played multiple times
in succession (especially for tambourine and cymbal sounds that you would want to ring out to their full decay).
Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only)
Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this
parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block.
Settings: Off, On
Element Pan (Element Pan Switch)
Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Element (made via ([EDIT] Part selection
Element selection [Amplitude] [Level/Pan] “Pan”) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the
pan position for each Element in the Part is set to center.
Settings: Off, On
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond.
Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the
maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both
“1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” For instructions on setting the Velocity Limit, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: 1–127
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part. Each Part will only sound for
notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for
example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
68
Reference
Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth)
Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the
tone generator responds to your playing strength. The higher
the value, the more the volume changes in response to your
playing strength (as shown below).
Settings: 0–127
Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset)
Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This
lets you raise or lower all velocities based on this setting value—allowing you to automatically compensate
for playing too strongly or too softly.
Settings: 0–127
You can select a Part with touch operations within these displays: Normal Part (AWM2) Edit, Drum Part
Edit, Normal Part (FM-X) Edit, and Common/Audio Edit. These instructions show an example display of
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit.
Part
Shows a currently selected Part. By touching a Part, a pop-up list appears, and then you can select a
different Part for editing.
Settings: Common, Part 1–16
From the Pitch display you can set Pitch-related parameters for the Part.
Pitch
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Part Settings]
[Pitch]
127
0
127
When Offset (below) is set to 64:
Actual resulting
velocity
(affecting the
tone generator)
Velocity with which you play a note
Depth=127
Depth=64
Depth=32
Depth=0
127
012764
127
64
127
0
12764
127
0
Velocity with which you play a note Velocity with which you play a noteVelocity with which you play a note
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 64
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 96
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 32
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
69
Reference
Portamento Master SW (Portamento Master Switch)
Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the
next. The Portamento Master Switch determines whether Portamento is applied to the entire Performance
or not.
Settings: Off, On
Portamento Part SW (Portamento Part Switch)
Determines whether Portamento is applied to the selected Part or not.
Settings: Off, On
Portamento Mode
Determines the Portamento mode.
Settings: Fingered, Full-time
Fingered: Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous
one).
Full-time: Portamento is applied to all notes.
Portamento Time
Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied.
Settings: 0–127
Portamento Time Mode
Determines how the pitch changes in time.
Settings: Rate 1, Time 1, Rate 2, Time 2
Rate 1: Pitch changes at the specified rate.
Time 1: Pitch changes in the specified time.
Rate 2: Pitch changes at the specified rate within an octave.
Time 2: Pitch changes in the specified time within an octave.
Portamento Legato Slope
Determines the speed of the attack of legato notes, when “Mono/Poly” is set to “Mono.” (Legato notes
“overlap” each other, the next being played before the previous is released.)
Settings: 0–7
Note Shift
Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones.
Settings: -24 – +0 – +24
Detune
Determines the pitch settings of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments.
Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz
Pitch Bend / (Pitch Bend Range Upper/Lower)
Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones.
Settings: -48 – +0 – +24
Micro Tuning Name
Determines the tuning system for the selected Part. For information on the various tuning systems, see the
Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Settings: Equal Temperament, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Werckmeister, Kirnberger, Vallotti & Young, 1/4 shift, 1/4 tone, 1/8 tone,
Indian, Arabic 1, Arabic 2, Arabic 3, User 1–8 (when the User Bank is selected), Library 1-1 – 8-8 (when the Library
file is read)
Micro Tuning Root
Determines the root note for the Micro Tuning function. This root note setting may not be necessary
depending on the “Micro Tuning Name” type.
Settings: C–B
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
70
Reference
Edit User Tuning
Calls up the User Micro Tuning Setting display.
Tuning No. (Micro Tuning Number)
Indicates the selected User Micro Tuning Number.
Settings: 1–8
Tuning Name (Micro Tuning Name)
Determines the name of the selected User Micro Tuning. Touching the parameter calls up the input
character display.
C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B
Adjusts the pitch of each note in 1 cent steps determines the Micro Tuning.
Settings: -99 – +99
Initialize
Initializes the selected User Micro Tuning.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
71
Reference
From the Zone Setting display you can set Zone-related parameters.
You can divide the keyboard into a maximum of eight independent areas (called “Zones”). To each Zone
can be assigned different MIDI channels. This makes it possible to control several Parts of the multi-timbral
tone generator simultaneously by a single keyboard or to control Parts of an external MIDI instrument over
several different channels in addition to the internal Parts of this synthesizer itself—letting you use the
MODX to effectively do the work of several keyboards.
To activate this display, select [UTILITY] [Settings] [Advanced], then set “Zone Master” to “ON.”
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Zone (Zone Switch)
Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off). When this is set to off, all of the following
parameters are not available.
Settings: Off, On
Int SW (Internal Switch)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by playing the keyboard in the range of the selected Zone
are transmitted to the internal tone generator or not.
Settings: Off, On
Transmit Ch (Transmit Channel)
Determines the MIDI Transmit Channel for the selected Zone.
Settings: Ch1–Ch16, Off
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the range for the selected Zone. The selected Zone will sound
only when you play notes within this range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for
example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8
Octave Shift
Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down. You can adjust the
offset up or down over a maximum range of three octaves.
Settings: -3 – +0 (Default) – +3
Transpose
Determines the amount in semitones by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down.
Settings: -11 – +0 (Default) – +11
Zone Settings
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Part Settings]
[Zone Settings]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
72
Reference
Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select)
Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change)
Determines whether Program Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This
is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression)
Determines whether volume messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not
available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Pan (Transmit Pan)
Determines whether Pan messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not
available when the Transmit Channel is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
MIDI Bank MSB/LSB (Bank Select MSB/LSB)
Determines the Bank numbers to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the
Performance. The Bank consists of MSB and LSB values. This is not available when “Transmit Bank Select”
is set to off.
Settings: 000–127
MIDI Pgm Num (Program Change Number)
Determines the Program Change Number to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting
the Performance. This is not available when the “Transmit Program Change” is set to off.
Settings: 001–128
MIDI Volume
Determines the transmit volume to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance.
This is not available when the Transmit Volume/Expression is set to “off”.
Settings: 0–127
MIDI Pan
Determines the Pan to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance.
This is not available when the Transmit Pan is set to “off.”
Settings: L64–C–R63
MIDI Send
By turning this parameter on, MIDI Bank, MIDI Pgm Number, MIDI Volume, or MIDI Pan is transmitted to
the external tone generator depending on the setting of the Transmit Switch.
This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off or when all of the four Transmit Switches are set
to off.
Settings: Off, On
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
73
Reference
From the Zone Transmit display you can set how each individual zone affects transmission of various MIDI
data, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to
“on,” playing the selected zone will transmit the corresponding MIDI data.
All settings made in this display are not available when “Transmit Ch” is set to “Off” in the Zone Setting
display.
To activate this display, select [UTILITY] [Settings] [Advanced], then set “Zone Master” to “ON.”
For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change)
Determines whether Program Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
Settings: Off, On
Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select)
Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Pitch Bend (Transmit Pitch Bend)
Determines whether Pitch Bend messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
Settings: Off, On
CC (Transmit Control Change)
Determines whether Control Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
Settings: Off, On
Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression)
Determines whether volume messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Pan (Transmit Pan)
Determines whether Pan messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Zone Transmit
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Part Settings]
[Zone Transmit]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
74
Reference
MW (Transmit Modulation Wheel)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel are transmitted to the
external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Sustain (Transmit Sustain)
Determines whether Sustain messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
FC1/FC2 (Transmit Fool Controller)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller are transmitted to
the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
FS (Transmit Foot Switch)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Switch are transmitted to the
external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
A. SW1/A. SW2 (Transmit Assignable Switch)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are
transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
MS Hold (Transmit Motion Sequencer Hold)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button are
transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
MS Trigger (Transmit Motion Sequencer Trigger)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button are
transmitted to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
A.Knob1–8 (Transmit Assignable Knob)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8) are transmitted
to the external tone generator or not.
This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off.
Settings: Off, On
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
75
Reference
From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for Parts.
Element 1–8 (Element Connection Switch)
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. The “Thru” setting
lets you bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element.
Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)
Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)
Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.
For Parts 9-16, the Ins FX SW is shown at the center of the page, and the Insertion effect of the currently
being edited Part can be switched ON or OFF.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Effect Category)
Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected Effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed
settings.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.
Effect
Routing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Effect] [Routing]
Insertion FX A Switch
Insertion FX B Switch
Ins FX SW
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
76
Reference
Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)
The Side Chain/Modulator uses the output from one track to control an effect in a different track. You can
specify the Effect type for activating the feature so that input signals for Parts other than the selected Part
or the audio input signal can control the specified Effect. This may not be active depending on the
particular Effect Type.
Here you can determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off
Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)
Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram
in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect
connection” (page 20) of the “Basic Structure.”
Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Determines the specific audio output.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2…7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1…8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Envelope Follower
Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. For details on the Envelope Follower, see the “Envelope
Follower Block” (page 21) in the “Basic Structure.”
Part (Input Source)
Displays the Part as “Input Source” for the selected Envelope Follower.
Settings: Master, AD, Part 1–Part 16
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
77
Reference
Gain (Envelope Follower Gain)
Determines the Input gain of the Input Source set in “Part.”
Settings: -24dB – 0dB – +24dB
Attack (Envelope Follower Attack)
Determines the attack time of the Envelope Follower.
Settings: 1ms–40ms
Release (Envelope Follower Release)
Determines the release time of the Envelope Follower.
Settings: 10ms–680ms
Input Level
Indicates the Input Level of the signal from the Input Source set in “Part.”
Envelope Follower Output
Indicates the Output Level of the Envelope Follower.
Edit
Calls up the Control Assign display for the Destination Part.
From the Insertion Effect A/Insertion Effect B display you can set parameters related to Insertion Effect.
Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)
Determines whether the selected Insertion Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Effect] [Ins A] /
[Ins B]
Insertion FX Switch
Effect Parameter
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
78
Reference
Category (Effect Category)
Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected Insertion Effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed
settings.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect types, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)
The Side Chain/Modulator uses the output from one track to control an effect in a different track. You can
specify the Effect type for activating the feature so that input signals for Parts other than the selected Part
or the audio input signal can control the specified Effect. This may not be active depending on the
particular Effect Type.
Here you can determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off
Effect Parameter
Active Effect parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
parameters, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect parameter,
see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
From the Part Equalizer display you can set parameters related to Part EQ.
EQ (Part Equalizer)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Effect] [EQ]
Part
3-band EQ 2-band EQInsertion Effect
Part EQ Part EQ
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
79
Reference
3-band EQ / 2-band EQ (3-band EQ/2-band EQ Switch)
Switches displays between 3-band EQ and 2-band EQ.
Settings: 3-band EQ, 2-band EQ
When “3-band EQ” is selected
From this display you can make 3-band EQ settings.
EQ Low Gain (3-band EQ Low Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ Mid Gain (3-band EQ Middle Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ Hi Gain (3-band EQ High Gain)
Determines the level gain of the High band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ Low Freq (3-band EQ Low Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Low band.
Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz
EQ Mid Freq (3-band EQ Middle Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Mid band.
Settings: 139.7Hz–10.1kHz
EQ Hi Freq (3-band EQ High Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the High band.
Settings: 503.8Hz–14.0kHz
EQ Mid Q (3-band EQ Middle Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Mid band.
Settings: 0.7–10.3
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
80
Reference
When “2-band EQ” is selected
From this display you can make 2-band EQ settings.
EQ1 Type (2-band EQ1 Type)/EQ2 Type (2-band EQ2 Type)
Determines the Equalizer Type.
Settings: Thru, LPF, HPF, Low Shelf, Hi Shelf, Peak/Dip
Thru: This setting bypasses the equalizers leaving the entire signal unaffected.
LPF/HPF: This setting only passes signals below or above the Cutoff Frequency.
Low Shelf/Hi Shelf: This setting attenuates/boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified
Frequency setting
Peak/Dip: This setting attenuates/boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting.
EQ 1 Gain (2-band EQ1 Gain)/EQ 2 Gain (2-band EQ2 Gain)
Determines the level gain of the frequency set in “EQ1 Freq” or “EQ2 Freq.”
This is not active when “EQ Type” is set to “Thru,” “LPF,” or “HPF.”
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ 1 Freq (2-band EQ1 Frequency)/EQ 2 Freq (2-band EQ2 Frequency)
Determines the frequency to be attenuated/boosted.
This is not active when “EQ Type” is set to “Thru.”
Settings: 63Hz–18.0Hz
+
0
+
0
Low Shelf High Shelf
Gain
Frequency
Gain
Frequency
Frequency
+
0
Gain
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
81
Reference
EQ 1 Q (2-band EQ1 Q)/EQ 2 Q (2-band EQ2 Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth for the frequency which is set in “EQ 1 Freq/EQ2 Freq.” This is available
only when “EQ Type” is set to “Peak/Dip.”
Settings: 0.1–12.0
NOTE For details on EQ structure, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Output Level (2-band Output Level)
Determines the Output level of the 2-band EQ.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
In the Insertion Assign display, you can set the Insertion Effect for Parts 9–16.
Active (Active Part)
Shows the number of Parts with the Ins FX SW set to ON. The number that follows the slash (/) sign is the
maximum number of Insertion Effects that can be simultaneously set to ON.
Part9–Part16
Sets the Insertion Effect for Parts 9-16 ON or OFF.
Settings: Off, On
NOTE The Insertion Effect for Parts 1–8 is always ON.
Ins Assign (Insertion Assign)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Effect]
[Ins Assign]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
82
Reference
From the Common display you can set Arpeggio-related parameters for the Part.
Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch)
Determines whether the Arpeggio for the selected Part is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Determines whether the Arpeggio for the entire Performance is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)
Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the
Arpeggios for Parts are being played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you
trigger it. The number shown at right of each value indicates the resolution in clocks.
Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Hold
Determines whether the Arpeggio continues cycling after the keys are released.
Settings: Sync-off, Off, On
Sync-off: Arpeggio playback continues to run silently, even when you release the keys. Pressing any key turns
Arpeggio playback on again, and the Arpeggio is heard from the point in the cycle where playback is resumed.
Off: The Arpeggio plays only while you hold the keys.
On: The Arpeggio cycles automatically, even if you release your fingers from the keys.
Arpeggio
Common
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Arpeggio]
[Common]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
83
Reference
Key Mode
Determines how the Arpeggio plays back when playing the keyboard.
Settings: Sort, Thru, Direct, Sort+Drct, Thru+Drct
Sort: When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the same sequence plays, no matter what
order you play the notes.
Thru: When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the resulting sequence differs depending on
the order of the notes.
Direct: Note events of the Arpeggio sequence do not play; only the notes you play on the keyboard are heard. When
the Arpeggio plays back, events such as Pan and Brightness are applied to the sound of your keyboard
performance. Use this setting when the Arpeggio types include non-note data or when you set the Arpeggio
Category to Control.
Sort+Drct: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Sort setting, and the notes played are also sounded.
Thru+Drct: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Thru setting, and the notes played are also sounded.
Velocity (Velocity Rate)
Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. If the resulting
Velocity value is 0, it will be set to 1. If the resulting Velocity value is greater than 128 it will be set to 127.
Settings: 0%–200%
Gate Time (Gate Time Rate)
Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. If the
resulting Gate Time value is 0, it will be set to 1.
Settings: 0%–200%
Change Timing
Determines the actual timing at which the Arpeggio type is switched when you select another type during
Arpeggio playback. When set to “Real-time,” the Arpeggio type is switched immediately. When set to
“Measure,” the Arpeggio type is switched at the top of the next measure.
Settings: Real-time, Measure
Loop
Determines whether the Arpeggio plays through a single time or continuously, while notes are held.
Settings: Off, On
Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only)
Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this
parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block.
Settings: Off, On
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
displayed in clocks.
For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length.
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Qntz Strength (Quantize Strength)
This parameter sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the quantize beat set in “Arp/MS
Grid.” A setting of 100% produces exact timing set in “Arp/MS Grid.” A setting of 0% results in no
quantization.
Settings: 0%–100%
Unit (Part Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio playback time. By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio from the
original one.
Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200%, 266%, 300%, 400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
84
Reference
Swing
Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.
+1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.
-1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.
0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.
Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce.
Settings: -120 – +120
Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit)
Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values in which the Arpeggio responds. Each Arpeggio
will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the maximum value
and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both “1 to 34” and “93
to 127.”
Settings: 1–127
Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit)
Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. Each Arpeggio will only sound for
notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for
example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8
Octave Shift (Arpeggio Output Octave Shift)
Shifts the pitch of the Arpeggio up or down in octaves.
Settings: -10 – +0 – +10
Octave Range (Arpeggio Octave Range)
Specifies the maximum Arpeggio range in octaves.
Settings: -3 – +0 – +3
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
85
Reference
From the Individual display you can set parameters corresponding to Arpeggio Selects 1–8.
Touching the Arpeggio Type Setting calls up a menu. In the displayed menu, touch [Search] to call up the
Arpeggio Category Search display (page 180) and touch [Number] to determine the Arpeggio Type by
specifying the Arpeggio Number.
Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch)
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)
Same as in the Common display.
Arp (Arpeggio Select)
Selects the desired Arpeggio stored as Arpeggio Select.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Arpeggios. For details, see
“Copying or Exchanging Arpeggios” (page 86).
Settings: 1–8
Category (Arpeggio Category)
Indicates the selected Arpeggio Category.
Settings: See the “Arpeggio Category List” on page 11.
Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)
Indicates the selected Arpeggio Sub Category.
Settings: See the “Arpeggio Sub Category List” on page 11.
Name (Arpeggio Name)
Indicates the selected Arpeggio Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Velocity (Velocity Rate)
Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. If the resulting
Velocity value is 0, it will be set to 1. If the resulting Velocity value is greater than 128 it will be set to 127.
Settings: -100% – +100%
Individual
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Arpeggio]
[Individual]
Arpeggio Type Settings
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
86
Reference
Gate Time (Gate Time Rate)
Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. If the
resulting Gate Time value is 0, it will be set to 1.
Settings: -100% – +100%
Copying or Exchanging Arpeggios
You can copy or exchange between Arpeggio types.
NOTE You can select “All” for Arp Select when copying between different Parts.
Copy
Touching this button activates the Arpeggio Type Copy function.
Exchange
Touching this button activates the Arpeggio Type Exchange function.
Part to be copied (or exchanged)
NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed.
Arpeggio Select to be copied (or exchanged)
Copy (or exchange) destination Part
Copy (or exchange) destination Arpeggio Select
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Select Part to be copied [Arpeggio] [Individual]
[SHIFT] + [EDIT]
or
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Arpeggio] Select Part to be copied [SHIFT] +
[EDIT]
Copy Exchange
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
87
Reference
From the Advanced display you can set advanced parameters related to the Arpeggio function.
Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch)
Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch)
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)
Same as in the Common display.
Accent Vel Threshold (Accent Velocity Threshold)
Determines the minimum velocity that will trigger the Accent Phrase.
Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when
you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold
parameter. If it is difficult to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “Accent Vel
Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value.
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the Data List PDF document.
Settings:
off, 1–127
Accent Start Quantize
Determines the start timing of the Accent Phrase when the Velocity specified in Accent Velocity Threshold
above is received. When this is set to off, the Accent Phrase starts as soon as the Velocity is received.
When this is set to on, the Accent Phrase starts on the beat specified for each Arpeggio type after the
Velocity is received.
Settings: off, on
Random SFX
Determines whether Random SFX is active or not.
Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar fret
noises) when the note is released.
NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF
document.
Settings:
off, on
Random SFX Velocity Offset
Determines the offset value by which the Random SFX notes will be shifted from their original velocities.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63
Advanced
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Arpeggio]
[Advanced]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
88
Reference
Random SFX Key On Ctrl (Random SFX Key On Control)
When this is set to “on,” the Random SFX sound is played at the velocity generated by the playing of each
note. When this is set to “off,” a special Random SFX sound is played at a pre-programmed velocity.
Settings: off, on
Velocity Mode
Adjusts the velocity of the Arpeggio notes.
Settings: Original, Thru
Original: The Arpeggio plays back at the Velocity set for the Arpeggio Type.
Thru: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Velocity of your playing.
Trigger Mode
When this is set to “Gate,” pressing the note starts Arpeggio playback and releasing the note stops it.
When this is set to “Toggle,” pressing the note starts/stops Arpeggio playback and releasing the note does
not affect Arpeggio playback.
Settings: Gate, Toggle
From the Common display you can set the parameters related to Motion Sequencer for the Part.
Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)
Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.
Settings: -120 – +120
Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.
This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer of
the Part is set to “Common.”
By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one.
Settings: 50%–400%
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Common
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Motion Seq]
[Common]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
89
Reference
Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)
Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value
for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100% – +100%
Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)
Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the
Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100% – +100%
Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines
how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in
the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step
curve shape of the sequence.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on
for the parameter).
Settings: -100 – +100
Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the
degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to
which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
Part Clock Swing (Clock Swing)
Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This parameter delays
notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel.
+1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes.
-1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes.
0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing.
Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce.
Settings: -120 – +120
Part Clock Unit (Part Unit Multiply)
This adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Part.
Settings: 50%–400%, Common
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
90
Reference
Part Arp Gate Time (Part Arpeggio Gate Time)
Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. This is
the offset value for the Gate Time Rate (page 86) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0%–200%
Part Arp Velocity (Part Arpeggio Velocity Rate)
Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. This is the offset
value for the Velocity Rate (page 85) of each Arpeggio Select setting.
Settings: 0%–200%
Part Motion Seq Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Amplitude (page 93) when “MS FX” is set to on for the
Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
Part Motion Seq Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq “Step Curve Parameter” (page 94) when “MS FX” is set to
on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter.
Settings: -100 – +100
Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part.
This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Smoothness (page 93) when “MS FX” is set to on for the
Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
Part Motion Seq Random (Part Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. “Random” is the degree to which
the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
Settings: 0–127
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
displayed in clocks.
For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length.
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
91
Reference
From the Lane display you can set parameters for each Lane of the Motion Sequencer.
Motion Seq Master SW (Motion Sequencer Master Switch)
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Motion Seq Part SW (Motion Sequencer Part Switch)
Determines whether the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Lane SW (Lane Switch)
Determines whether each Lane is active or not. Up to four Lanes of Motion Sequencer can be used for one
Part and up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. When this is set to off,
parameters related to the corresponding Lane will not be displayed.
Settings: Off, On
MS FX (Lane Motion Sequencer FX Receive)
Determines whether or not the selected Lane is affected by Knob operations when the “ARP/MS” is
selected with the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button.
Settings: Off, On
Trigger (Lane Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive)
Determines whether or not the selected Lane receives the signal generated by [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER]
button. When this is set to on, the Motion Sequence will begin whenever you press the [MOTION SEQ
TRIGGER] button.
Settings: Off, On
Sequence Select (Lane Motion Sequence Select)
Selects the desired Motion Sequence.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Settings: 1–8
Lane
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Motion Seq]
[Lane]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
92
Reference
Sync (Lane Motion Sequencer Sync)
Determines if the playback of the Motion Sequence applied to the Destination (set in the Control Assign
display (page 100)) is synchronized to the Tempo, Beat, or Arpeggio of the Performance.
Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp, Lane 1 (when Lane 2–4 is selected)
Off: Lane Motion Sequencer plays back according to its own clock and is not synchronized to an external clock.
Tempo: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Performance tempo.
Beat: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the beat.
Arp: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the 1st beat of the measure of the currently playing Arpeggio.
Lane 1: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Lane 1.
Speed (Lane Motion Sequencer Speed)
Determines the playback speed of the Motion Sequence.
This is available only when the “Lane Motion Sequencer Sync” is set to “Off.”
Settings: 0–127
Unit Multiply (Lane Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Lane.
This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Off” and
“Lane 1.”
Settings: 50%–6400%, Common, Arp
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied.
Arp: The value set in the Arpeggio Unit Multiply for the selected Part will be applied.
Key On Reset (Lane Motion Sequencer Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the playback of the Motion Sequence is stopped when you play the keyboard.
This parameter is active when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than
“Arp” and “Lane 1.”
Also this parameter is not available when “Trigger” is set to “On.”
Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On
Each-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequence from the beginning.
1st-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequencer from the beginning. If you play a
second note while the first is being held, the Sequence continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered
by the first note—in other words, the Sequence only resets if the first note is released before the second is played.
Loop (Lane Motion Sequencer Loop)
Determines whether the Motion Sequence is played only once or repeatedly.
This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Lane 1.”
Settings: Off, On
Velocity Limit (Lane Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit)
Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values in which the Motion Sequence responds.
This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Lane 1.”
Settings: 1–127
Cycle (Lane Motion Sequencer Cycle)
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 1–16
Load Sequence
Loads Motion Sequence data in the User Memory. For details about Loading, see “Load” (page 198).
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
93
Reference
Edit Sequence
Calls up the Motion Sequence setting display. You can create a custom Sequence consisting of up to
sixteen steps.
Lane (Current Select Lane)
Indicates the currently selected Lane. This parameter is not displayed when the corresponding Lane
Switch is set to off.
Settings: 1–4
Cycle (Lane Motion Sequencer Cycle)
Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 1–16
Amplitude (Lane Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
Settings: 0–127
Smooth (Lane Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the smoothness of the time change of the Motion Sequence.
Settings: 0–127
Sequence Select (Lane Motion Sequence Select)
Determines the Motion Sequence Select.
By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For
details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95).
Settings: 1–8
Polarity (Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity)
Determines the Sequence Polarity.
Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar
Unipolar: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction from a base parameter value according to the Sequence.
Bipolar: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.
Motion Seq Step Value (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Value)
Determines the Step Value for the Motion Sequence. You can control the Step Value 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 or 13–
16 by the Control Sliders 1–4 (5–8 / 9–12 / 13–16) depending on the cursor position on the display.
Settings: 0–127
Motion Seq Step Value (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Value)
Motion Seq Step Type (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Type)
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
94
Reference
Motion Seq Step Type (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Type)
Determines each Step Type of the Motion Sequence. You can switch between the Step Types A and B for
the Step 1–8 or 9–16 by the SCENE [1/5]–[4/8] buttons depending on the cursor position on the display.
Settings: A, B
Pulse A / Pulse B (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Type)
Determines the Curve Type of the parameter for each of “Pulse A” and “Pulse B.” “Motion Seq Step Type”
described above determines which curve set here is used for each step.
Settings: For Preset Bank: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle,
Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold
For details, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
For User Bank: User 1–32
When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1–8
Direction (Lance Motion Sequencer Step Curve Direction)
Determines the Direction of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
Settings: Forward, Reverse
Prm1/Prm2 (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Parameter)
Adjusts the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence.
This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Also the range of available parameter
values differs depending on the Curve Type.
Control (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Shape Control Switch)
Determines whether or not to control the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence by operating
Knobs. This parameter is displayed only when “MS FX” is set to on. Also this parameter is not available
depending on the Curve Type.
Settings: Off, On
Store Sequence
Stores the edited Sequence data. For details about storing data, see “Store/Save” (page 201).
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
95
Reference
Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences
You can copy or exchange between Motion Sequences.
NOTE You can select “All” for “Lane” and “MS Select” when copying between different Parts.
Copy
Touching this button activates the Motion Sequence Copy function.
Exchange
Touching this button activates the Motion Sequence Exchange function.
Part to be copied (or exchanged)
NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed.
Lane to be copied (or exchanged)
Motion Sequence Select to be copied (or exchanged)
Copy (or exchange) destination Part
Copy (or exchange) destination Lane
Copy (or exchange) destination Motion Sequence Select
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Select Part to be copied [Motion Seq] [Lane] [SHIFT]
+ [EDIT]
or
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Motion Seq] Select Part to be copied [SHIFT]
+ [EDIT]
or
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Knob Auto] [SHIFT] + [EDIT]
Copy Exchange
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
96
Reference
From the Part LFO display you can set the LFO-related parameters for the Part.
LFO Wave
Selects the LFO waveform.
Settings: Triangle, Triangle+, Saw Up, Saw Down, Squ1/4, Squ1/3, Square, Squ2/3, Squ3/4, Trapezoid, S/H1, S/H2, User
Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync)
Determines whether or not the LFO is synchronized to the tempo of the Arpeggio or Song.
Settings: Off (not synchronized), On (synchronized)
Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)
Part LFO
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Mod/Control]
[Part LFO]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
97
Reference
When “Tempo Sync” is set to “OFF”
Speed (LFO Speed)
Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. This is not available when the Tempo Sync parameter
is set to “On.”
Settings: 0–63
Random Speed (LFO Random Speed Depth)
Determines the degree to which the LFO speed changes at random.
Settings: 0–127
When “Tempo Sync” is set to “ON”
Tempo Speed (LFO Tempo Speed)
This parameter is available only when “Tempo Sync” above has been set to “ON.” It allows you to make
detailed note value settings that determine how the LFO pulses in sync with the Arpeggio.
Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.
(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note
triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5
(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the
beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight
quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 16 (sixteen quarter-notes to the beat), 1/4 x 32 (32 quarter notes to the beat),
1/4 x 64 (64 quarter notes to the beat)
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
98
Reference
Delay (LFO Delay Time)
Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO
comes into effect.
Settings: 0–127
Fade In (LFO Fade In Time)
Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the “Delay” time has elapsed).
Settings: 0–127
Hold (LFO Hold Time)
Determines the length of time during which the LFO is held at its maximum level.
Settings: 0–126, Hold
Hold: No fade-out
Fade Out (LFO Fade Out Time)
Determines the time over which the LFO effect is faded out (after the “Hold” time has elapsed).
Settings: 0–127
Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is pressed.
Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On
Each-On: The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase
parameter.
1st-On: The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase
parameter. If you play a second note while the first is being held, the LFO continues cycling according to the same
phase as triggered by the first note—in other words, the LFO only resets if the first note is released before the second
is played.
Loop (LFO Loop)
Determines whether the LFO Wave plays through a single time (off) or continuously (on).
Settings: Off, On
Phase (LFO Phase)
Determines the starting phase point for the LFO Wave when it is reset.
Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 27
Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase Offset)
Determines the offset values of the “Phase” parameter (above) for the respective Elements.
Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 27
Destination (LFO Destination)
Determines the functions which will be controlled by the LFO Wave.
Settings: Insertion Effect A Parameter 1–24, Insertion Effect B Parameter 1–24, Level, Pitch, Cutoff, Resonance, Pan, E.LFO
Speed
Depth (LFO Depth)
Set the LFO Wave Depth (amplitude) for “Destination” parameter (above).
Settings: 0–127
Element Depth Ratio (LFO Element Depth Ratio)
Determines the offset values of the “Depth” parameter (above) for the respective Elements.
When set to “Off,” the LFO effect is not available. This is available only when Element-related parameters
are set in “Destination.”
Settings: Off, 0–127
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
99
Reference
Edit User LFO
Calls up the User LFO Setting display. You can create a custom LFO wave consisting of up to sixteen
steps.
Cycle
Selects the desired step length for the LFO.
Settings: 2 steps, 3 steps, 4 steps, 6 steps, 8 steps, 12 steps, 16 steps
Slope
Determines the slope or ramp characteristics of the LFO wave.
Settings: Off (no slope), Up, Down, Up&Down
User LFO Step Value
Determines the level for each step.
Settings: -64 – +63
Template
This includes pre-programmed settings for creating an original LFO.
User LFO Step Value
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
100
Reference
From the Control Assign display you can make controller assign settings for the Part.
You can change sounds as desired by setting the desired controller to “Source” and the desired parameter
to “Destination.” Not only physical controllers such as the Pitch Bend wheel but also Motion Sequencer or
Envelope Follower can be set to “Source” as a virtual controller.
Up to 16 Controller Sets can be assigned to each Part.
Auto Select (Auto Select Switch)
Determines whether the Auto Select function for Display Filter (below) is active (On) or not (Off). When this
parameter is set to “On,” the operated Controller is automatically set in “Display Filter”. Also you can obtain
the same result by pressing the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button.
Settings: Off, On
Display Filter
Determines the Controller to be displayed. When “Super Knob” is selected, all Assignable Knob settings to
be affected by using the Super Knob are displayed.
Settings: PitchBend, ModWheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1–8, Super Knob,
AsgnSw 1, AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst, All
Display Name
Determines the name of each Assignable Knob 1–8 which is displayed in the Performance Play display
(page 27). This is available only when “AsgnKnob 1–8” is set in “Source.”
Control Assign
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Mod/Control]
[Control Assign]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
101
Reference
Destination
Determines the target parameter to be controlled. To add another Destination, touch “+” icon. For
information on setting examples for “Destination,” see below.
Settings: See the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document.
Destination Setting Examples
The following settings are some useful examples how to set the Destination.
Concerning *1 and *2, the following settings are necessary in addition to the above settings.
*1 “Ins A/B Type” = “Rotary Speaker” in the Effect display of Part Edit
*2 “Ins A/B Type” = “VCM Pedal Wah” in the Effect display of Part Edit
Source
Determines the desired Controller for controlling the parameter set in “Destination.”
Settings: PitchBend, Modwheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1–8, AsgnSw 1,
AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst
Element SW (Element Switch)
Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Element (On) or not (Off). This is available only
when Element-related parameters are set in “Destination.”
Settings: Off, On
To control the volume: Part Param Volume
To change the pitch: Part Param Pitch
To change the speed of the Rotary Speaker: Ins A/B InsA/B SpdCtrl
*1
To apply a Wah pedal effect: Ins A/B InsA/B PdlCtrl
*2
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
102
Reference
Curve Type
Determines the Curve type of the parameter set in “Destination.” In the illustrations below, the vertical axis
indicates the operation value of the controller set in “Destination” and the horizontal axis indicates the
parameter value set in “Source.”
Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt
Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold, User 1–32 (when User Bank is selected), Library 1–8 (when the Library
file is read)
Polarity (Curve Polarity)
Determines the Curve Polarity of the Curve type set in “Curve Type.”
Settings: Uni, Bi
Uni: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction or in a negative direction from a base parameter value according
to the Curve shape.
Bi: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.
Ratio (Curve Ratio)
Determines the Curve Ratio.
Settings: -64 – +63
Standard
Sigmoid
Threshold
Bell
Dogleg
FM
AM
M
Discrete Saw
Smooth Saw
Triangle
Square
Trapezoid
Tilt Sine
Bounce
Resonance
Sequence
Hold
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
103
Reference
Param 1/Param 2 (Curve Parameter)
Adjusts the Curve shape.
This is not available depending on the Curve Type.
Destination to Name
Copies the Parameter name from “Destination” to “Display Name.” This is available only when “Source” is
set to “AsgnKnob 1–8.”
Edit Common Control Settings
Calls up the Control Assign display for Common/Audio Edit.
Delete
Deletes the selected “Destination.”
Edit User Curve
Calls up the User Curve Setting display. You can select “Linear” (Curve by Linear Interpolation of eight
coefficients) or “Step.”
Curve No. (Curve Number)
Indicates the selected Curve Number.
Settings: 1–32
Curve Name
Names the selected Curve. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
Curve Type
Determines the Curve Type.
Settings: Linear, Step
Input
Determines the Input level of the Curve. “Input 1” is fixed to “0.” “Input 8” is fixed to 127 when the Curve
Type isLinear.
Settings: 0–127
Output
Determines the Output level of the Curve.
Settings: 0–127
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
104
Reference
Selecting Controllers from a display other than Control Assign
While displays other than the Control Assign display are shown, you can select controllers using the
[CONTROL ASSIGN] button on the panel. When the cursor is on the parameter that can be set as a
Destination, the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button on the panel lights up. Press the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button
while the button is lit, and the Destination Parameter display appears. Move the controller on the panel or
touch a number shown on the display to select a Source. The Control Assign display then appears with the
Source selected in the Destination Parameter display set as the Source.
NOTE An error message appears when you move the Super knob and there are no more Assignable Knobs available
for assigning a Source.
Motion Sequencer Lane
Envelope Follower
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
105
Reference
From the Receive Switch display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such
as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “ON,” the
corresponding Part responds to the appropriate MIDI data.
NOTE If CC (Receive Control Change) here is set to “OFF,” parameters related to Control Change are not available.
Pgm Change (Receive Program Change)
Determines whether Program Change messages are received or not.
Settings: Off, On
Bank Select (Receive Bank Select)
Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
Pitch Bend (Receive Pitch Bend)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Pitch Bend Wheel are received or not.
Settings: Off, On
After Touch (Receive After Touch)
Determines whether After Touch messages are received or not.
Settings: Off, On
CC (Receive Control Change)
Determines whether Control Change messages are received or not.
Settings: Off, On
Vol/Exp (Receive Volume/Expression)
Determines whether volume messages are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
Pan (Receive Pan)
Determines whether Pan messages are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
Receive SW (Receive Switch)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Mod/Control]
[Receive SW]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
106
Reference
MW (Receive Modulation Wheel)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
Sustain (Receive Sustain)
Determines whether Sustain messages are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
FC1/FC2 (Receive Foot Controller)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller are received or
not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
FS (Receive Foot Switch)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Switch are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
A. SW1/A. SW2 (Receive Assignable Switch)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are
received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
MS Hold (Receive Motion Sequencer Hold)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button are received
or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
MS Trigger (Receive Motion Sequencer Trigger)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button are
received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
RB (Receive Ribbon Controller)
Determines whether MIDI messages for Ribbon Controller are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
BC (Receive Breath Controller)
Determines whether MIDI messages for Breath Controller are received or not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
A.Knob 1–8 (Receive Assignable Knob)
Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8) are received or
not.
This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off.
Settings: Off, On
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
107
Reference
Element Edit (Element)
From the Oscillator/Tune display you can assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element.
You can set the note range for the Element (the range of notes on the keyboard over which the Element will
sound) as well as the velocity response (the range of note velocities within which the Element will sound).
Bank (Waveform Bank)
Number (Waveform Number)
Category (Waveform Category)
Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category)
Name (Waveform Name)
Indicates the information of the waveform used for the selected Element. “Bank” indicates which waveform
location (Preset, User and Library) is assigned to the Element.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Element Switch
Determines whether the currently selected Element is on or off.
Settings: Off, On
XA Control
Determines the functioning of the Expanded Articulation (XA) feature of an Element.
The XA feature is sophisticated tone generator system that allows you to more effectively recreate realistic
sound and natural performance techniques. It also provides other unique modes for random and alternate
sound changes as you play. For details on the XA feature, see the “Tone Generator Block” in the “Basic
Structure” on page 6.
Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.SW Off, A.SW1 On, A.SW2 On
For each Element, you can set to:
Normal: The Element sounds normally each time you play the note.
Legato: When the Mono/Poly parameter is set to Mono, this Element will be played in place of the one which is set to
“Normal” of the XA Control parameter when you play the keyboard in legato fashion (playing the next note of a single-note
line or melody before releasing the previous note).
Key Off: The Element will sound each time you release the note.
Cycle (for multiple Elements): Each Element sounds alternately according to its numerical order. In other words, playing the
first note will sound Element 1, the second note Element 2, and so on.
Random (for multiple Elements): Each Element will sound randomly each time you play the note.
A.SW1 On: When the [ASSIGN 1] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW2 On: When the [ASSIGN 2] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW Off: When both the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are turned Off, the Element will sound.
Osc/Tune (Oscillator/Tune)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Osc/Tune]
Element Switch
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
108
Reference
Elem Group (Element Group)
Determines the group for XA Control. All Elements that have the same type of XA features must have the
same group number. This setting does not apply when the XA Control parameters of all Elements are set to
Normal.
Settings: 1–8
Elem Connect (Element Connection Switch)
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. Set this to “Thru” to
bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element.
Settings: Thru, InsA, InsB
New Waveform
Loads Audio data stored in the USB flash drive as “Waveform.” For details on loading, see “Load”
(page 198).
After the Waveform is loaded, the Edit Waveform parameter (below) will be available.
Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones.
Settings: -48 – +48
Fine (Fine Tune)
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element.
Settings: -64 – 63
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the pitch of the selected Element responds to velocity.
Settings: -64 – 63
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.
0: No change in pitch.
Fine/Key (Pitch Fine Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the pitch in
Fine Tuning.
Settings: -64 – 63
Positive values: The pitch of lower notes drops and that of higher notes rises.
Negative values: The pitch of lower notes rises and that of higher notes drops.
Random (Random Pitch Depth)
Allows you to randomly vary the pitch of the Element for each note you play. The higher the value, the
greater the pitch variation.
Settings: 0–127
Vel Cross Fade (Velocity Cross Fade)
Determines how gradually the volume of an Oscillator decreases in proportion to the distance of Velocity
changes outside the Velocity Limit setting.
Settings: 0–127
The higher the value, the more gradually the volume decreases.
0: No sound
Tempo Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch)
Determines whether or not “Key On Delay” (below) is synchronized to the tempo.
Settings: Off, On
Length (Key On Delay Time Length)
Determines the time (or elapsed delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the
point at which the sound is actually played. You can set different delay times for each Element. This is not
available when “Key On Delay Tempo Sync” is set to on.
Settings: 0–127
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
109
Reference
Length (Key On Delay Note Length)
Determines the timing of “Key On Delay” when “Key On Delay Tempo Sync” is set to on.
Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.
(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note
triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5
(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the
beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter
notes to the beat)
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will
respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first
specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range
covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.”
Settings: 1–127
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only
sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest
note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8
Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes), assuming the pitch
of the Center Key (below) as standard.
Settings: -200% – +0% – +200%
+100% (the normal setting): Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart.
0%: All notes have the same pitch as the Center Key.
Negative values: The settings are reversed.
Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch.
Settings: C -2 – G8
Edit Waveform
Calls up the Waveform Edit display.
From this display you can set parameters related to Key Banks consisting of the Waveform.
•Key Bank
A Key Bank is digital audio data, made by directly recording a signal, such as that of vocals or
electric guitar, to this instrument.
Throughout this manual, the words “Key Bank” and “Wave” are sometimes used interchangeably;
however, you should be careful to distinguish between “Key Bank” (raw audio data) and “Waveform”
(collected audio data used to make up a Part).
Key Bank and Waveform
Key Banks are assigned and stored to Waveforms on the MODX.
Each of the Waveforms can contain multiple Key Banks. To assign these Key Banks to a different
space or container, you can set the note limit and velocity limit for each Key Bank. With this setting,
the different Key Bank is played back depending on the pressed note and its velocity.
40
127
D#2 A#2 G#3
F4
Waveform
Waveform
Velocity
Key Number
(Note Number)
Key
Bank 1
Key Bank 2 Key Bank 4
Key Bank 3 Key Bank 5
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
110
Reference
Part and Waveform
You can play the Waveform by assigning it to a Part then playing the keyboard with that Part. You can
assign the Waveform to an Element of the Part in the Element Edit for the Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
(page 107) and the Key Edit for the Drum Part Edit (page 140).
Waveform
Indicates the selected Waveform.
Category (Waveform Main Category)
Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category)
Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Waveform.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Name (Waveform Name)
Determines the selected Waveform. Waveform names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
Number of Keybank (Number of Key Bank)
Indicates the number of Key Banks in the selected Waveform.
Waveform Total Size
Indicates the total data size of the selected Waveform.
Keybank (Key Bank)
Indicates the selected Key Bank.
Size (Key Bank Size)
Indicates the data size of the selected Key Bank.
Channel (Key Bank Channel)
Indicates the Channel (Stereo or Mono) of the selected Key Bank.
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which the selected Key Bank
will respond.
Settings: 1–127
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for the selected Key Bank.
Settings: 1–127
Number of Key Banks
Waveform Total Size
Note Limit and Velocity Limit for each Key Bank
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
111
Reference
Volume
Determines the output volume of the selected Key Bank.
Settings: 0–255
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Key Bank.
Settings: L63–C–R63
Tune Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Determines the pitch of the selected Key Bank in semitones.
Settings: -64 – +63
Tune Fine (Fine Tune)
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of the selected Key Bank.
Settings: -64 – +63
Delete Keybank (Delete Key Bank)
Deletes the selected Key Bank.
Add Keybank (Add Key Bank)
Adds new Key Bank to the selected Waveform.
From the Pitch EG display you can make all time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine how
the pitch of the sound changes over time for Oscillators. These can be used to control the change in pitch
from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops.
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Settings: Time: 0–127
Level: -128 – +127
Pitch EG
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Pitch EG]
Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release
Time
Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time
Level
Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
112
Reference
Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG
times. The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: High notes result in a high PEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High notes result in a slow PEG transition speed while low notes result in a high speed.
0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
Center Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Determines how the PEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or to the strength with which the key
is pressed. When the Center Key note is played, the PEG behaves according to its actual settings.
Settings: C-2–G8
Time/Vel (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity)
Segment (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment)
Determines the velocity sensitivity of the PEG’s Time parameters. Select the Segment, and then set its
“Time/Vel” parameter.
Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast PEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow PEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed.
0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All
Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack Time.
Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 Time.
Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time
Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release Time.
All: Time/Vel affects all PEG Time parameters.
PEG Depth
Determines the pitch range for Pitch EG.
Settings: -64 – +63
Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity)
Curve (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve)
Determines how the pitch range will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play
notes on the keyboard. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves
(graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Pitch EG Depth. In the
illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates Pitch Change and the horizontal axis indicates Velocity.
Settings: Depth/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: High Velocities cause the pitch range to expand and low Velocities cause it to contract.
Negative values: High Velocities cause the pitch range to contract and low Velocities cause it to expand.
0: The pitch envelope does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Settings: Curve: 0–4
NOTE For details on PEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
0 31 42
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
113
Reference
From the Type display you can make comprehensive settings for the Filter unit. The available parameters
differ depending on which Filter type is selected here.
Filter Type
Determines the Filter Type for the current Element. Basically, there are four different filters: LPF (Low Pass
Filter), HPF (High Pass Filter), BPF (Band Pass Filter) and BEF (Band Elimination Filter). For details on
settings, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Settings: LPF24D, LPF24A, LPF18, LPF18s, LPF12+HPF12, LPF6+HPF12, HPF24D, HPF12, BPF12D, BPFw, BPF6, BEF12,
BEF6, DualLPF, DualHPF, DualBPF, DualBEF, LPF12+BPF6, Thru
LPF
LPF24D: A dynamic -24 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter with a characteristic digital sound. Compared to the LPF24A type,
this filter can produce a more pronounced Resonance effect.
LPF24A: A digital dynamic Low-Pass Filter with characteristics similar to a 4-pole analog synthesizer filter.
LPF18: 3-pole -18 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter.
LPF18s: 3-pole -18 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter. This filter has a smoother cutoff slope than the LPF18 type.
Filter
Type
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Filter] [Type]
Cutoff
Frequency
Gain
Frequency
Frequencies that are
“passed” by the filter
Gain
Cutoff
Frequency
Resonance
Frequency
Resonance
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Gain
Frequency
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
114
Reference
HPF
LPF12+HPF12: A combination of a -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filter connected in serial.
When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff and HPF Key Follow Sensitivity can be set
LPF6+HPF12: A combination of a -6 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filter connected in serial.
When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff and HPF Key Follow Sensitivity can be set.
HPF24D: A dynamic -24 dB/oct High-Pass Filter with a characteristic digital sound. This filter can produce a
pronounced Resonance effect.
HPF12: -12 dB/oct dynamic High-Pass Filter.
BPF
BPF12D: The combination of a -12 dB/oct HPF and LPF with a characteristic digital sound.
BPFw: A -12 dB/oct BPF that combines HPF and LPF filters to allow wider bandwidth settings.
BPF6: The combination of a -6 dB/oct HPF and LPF.
Gain
Cutoff Frequency
Resonance
Frequency
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Resonance
Gain
Frequency
Frequencies that are “passed”
by the filter
Center Frequency
Gain
Frequency
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Gain
Frequency
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Resonance
Gain
Frequency
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Width
Gain
Frequency
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Resonance
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
115
Reference
BEF
BEF12: -12 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filter.
BEF6: -6 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filter.
DualLPF: Two -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filters connected in parallel. You can edit the distance between the two Cutoff
Frequencies.
DualHPF: Two -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filters connected in parallel.
DualBPF: Two -6 dB/oct Band-Pass Filters connected in parallel.
DualBEF: Two -6 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filters connected in serial.
LPF12+BPF6: A combination of a -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -6 dB/oct Band-Pass Filter connected in
parallel. You can edit the distance between the two Cutoff Frequencies.
Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the cutoff frequency for the Filter. This is used as the basic frequency for the selected Filter
Type.
Settings: 0–255
Cutoff/Vel (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity, or the strength with which you play notes.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the Cutoff Frequency rises.
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the Cutoff Frequency rises.
0: The Cutoff Frequency does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Center Frequency
Gain
Frequency
Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter
Gain
Frequency
Distance
Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display
(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)
Gain
Frequency
Distance
Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display
(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)
Gain
Frequency
Distance
Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display
(and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set)
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
116
Reference
Resonance
Width
This parameter’s function varies according to the selected Filter Type. If the selected filter is an LPF, HPF,
BPF (excluding BPFw), or BEF, this parameter is used to set the Resonance. For the BPFw, it is used to
adjust the frequency bandwidth. This parameter is used to set the amount of Resonance (harmonic
emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency. This can be used in combination with the “Cutoff”
parameter to add further character to the sound. For the BPFw, this parameter is used to adjust the width
of the band of signal frequencies passed by the filter.
This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Types.
Settings: 0–127
Cutoff/Key (Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Cutoff
Frequency (above). The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic Cutoff Frequency for this
parameter.
Settings: - 200% – +200%
Positive values: The Cutoff Frequency drops for lower notes and rises for higher notes.
Negative values: The Cutoff Frequency rises for lower notes and drops for higher notes.
Center Key (Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
This indicates that the central note for “Cutoff/Key” above is C3. Keep in mind that this is for display
purposes only; the value cannot be changed.
Gain
Sets the Gain (the amount of boost applied to the signal sent to the Filter Unit).
In case of the Filter Type with “Distance” and “Res/Vel” parameters
Distance
Determines the distance between the Cutoff Frequencies for the Dual Filter types and the LPF12+BPF6
filter. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Type.
Settings: -128 – +127
Res/Vel (Resonance Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which Resonance responds to Velocity, or the strength with which you play
notes. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Type.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: The higher the Velocity, the greater the Resonance.
Negative values: The lower the Velocity, the greater the Resonance.
0: No change of the Resonance value.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
117
Reference
In case of the Filter Type with “HPF Cutoff” and “HPF Cutoff/Key” parameters
HPF Cutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the central frequency for the Key Follow parameter (below) of the HPF. This parameter is
available only when one of the filter types “LPF12+HPF12” or “LPF6+HPF12” is selected.
Settings: 0–255
HPF Cutoff/Key (High Pass Filter Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or Octave Range) affect the Cutoff
Frequency of the HPF. This parameter is available only when one of the filter types “LPF12+HPF12” or
“LPF6+HPF12” is selected.
Settings: -200% – +200%
Positive values: The Cutoff Frequency drops for lower notes and rises for higher notes.
Negative values: The Cutoff Frequency rises for lower notes and drops for higher notes.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
118
Reference
From the Filter EG display you can make all time and level settings for the Filter EG, which determine how
the sound changes over time for Elements. These can be used to control the change the sound from the
moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops.
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Settings: Time: 0–127
Level: -128 – +127
Time/Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Filter EG
Times. The basic speed of change for the FEG is at the note specified in Center Key (below).
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: High notes result in a high FEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High notes result in a slow FEG transition speed while low notes result in a high speed.
0: The FEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
Center Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Determines the central note for the “Time/Key” parameter above.
Settings: C-2–G8
Filter EG
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Filter] [Filter EG]
Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release
Time
Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time
Level
Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
119
Reference
Time/Vel (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity)
Segment (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment)
Determines how the FEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or the strength with which the key is
pressed. Select the “Segment,” and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter.
Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast FEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow FEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed.
0: The pitch transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All
Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack time.
Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 time.
Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time.
Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release time.
All: Time/Vel affects all FEG Time parameters.
FEG Depth
Determines the Cutoff Frequency range for Filter EG.
Settings: -64 – +63
Depth/Vel (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity)
Curve (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve)
Determines how the range of the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity (strength) with which you play
notes on the keyboard. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves
(graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Filter EG Depth. In the
illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates Cutoff Frequency Change and the horizontal axis indicates
Velocity.
Settings: Depth/Vel: -64 – +63
Settings: Curve: 0–4
NOTE For details on FEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
0 31 42
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
120
Reference
From the Filter Scale display you can set parameters related to Filter Scale for Elements.
“Filter Scale” controls the Filter Cutoff Frequency according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard.
Break Point 1–4
Determines the four Break Points by specifying the respective note numbers.
Settings: C -2 – G8
NOTE Break Points 1 to 4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard.
Cutoff Offset 1–4
Determines the offset value to the Cutoff Frequency at each Break Point.
Settings: -128 – +127
NOTE Regardless of the size of these Offsets, the minimum and maximum Cutoff limits (values of 0 and 127,
respectively) cannot be exceeded.
NOTE Any note played below the Break Point 1 note results in the Break Point 1 Level setting. Likewise, any note
played above the Break Point 4 note results in the Break Point 4 Level setting.
NOTE For information on setting examples for Filter Scaling, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Scale (Filter Scale)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Filter] [Scale]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
121
Reference
From the Level/Pan display you can make Level and Pan settings for each individual Element.
Level
Determines the output level of the Element.
Settings: 0–127
Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity)
Offset (Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset)
Curve (Level Velocity Sensitivity Curve)
Determines how the actual Velocity will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you
play notes on the keyboard. The Offset parameter raises or lowers the level specified by the “Level/Vel.”
If the result is higher than 127, the velocity is set to 127. The Curve parameter lets you select from five
different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the
actual Velocity. In the illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates the actual resulting Velocity and the
horizontal axis indicates Velocity with which you play notes.
Settings: Level/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
0: The output level does not change.
Settings: Offset: 0–127
A: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 0
B: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 32
C: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 64
X: Velocity with which you play a note
Y: Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator)
Amplitude
Level/Pan
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Amplitude]
[Level/Pan]
064
127
127
A
B
X
Y
C
064
127
127
A
B
X
Y
C
064
127
127
A
B
X
Y
C
Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 0 Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 64 Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 96
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
122
Reference
Settings: Curve: 0–4
Pan (Element Pan)
Determines the stereo Pan position for the selected Element.
Settings: L63–C (center)–R63
Alternate Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound is panned alternately left and right for each note you press.
The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position.
Settings: L64–C–R63
Random Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Element is panned randomly left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position.
Settings: 0–127
Scaling Pan
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan
position, left and right, of the selected Element. At note C3, the main Pan setting (above) is used for the
basic Pan position.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63
Positive values: Moves the pan position to the left for lower notes and to the right for higher notes.
Negative values: Moves the pan position to the right for lower notes and to the left for higher notes.
Level/Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the volume of
the selected Element. A Center Key setting of C3 is used as the basic setting.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63
Positive values: Lowers the output level for lower notes and raises it for higher notes.
Negative values: Raises the output level for lower notes and lowers it for higher notes.
Center Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
This indicates that the central note for “Level/Key” above is C3. Keep in mind that this is for display
purposes only; the value cannot be changed.
0 31 42
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
123
Reference
From the Amplitude EG display you can make all the time and level settings for the Amplitude EG, which
determine how the volume of the sound changes over time. Using the AEG, you can control the transition
in volume from the moment the sound starts is to the moment the sound stops.
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Settings: Time: 0–127
Level: 0–127
Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude
EG Times. The Center Key parameter (below) is used as the basic amplitude for this parameter.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: High notes result in a fast Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High notes result in a slow Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a fast speed.
0: The Amplitude EG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
Center Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Determines the central note for the “Time/Key” parameter above. When the Center Key note is played, the
AEG behaves according to its actual settings.
Settings: C-2–G8
Release Adj (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key Release Adjustment)
Determines the sensitivity of AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity to AEG Release. The lower the value, the
lower the sensitivity.
Settings: 0–127
127: Sets the AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity to the value of Decay 1 or Decay 2.
0: Produces no effect in the AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity.
Amp EG (Amplitude EG)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Amplitude]
[Amp EG]
Initial Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release
Time
Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time
Level
Initial Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
124
Reference
Time/Vel (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity)
Segment (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment)
Determines how the AEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or the strength with which the key is
pressed. Select the “Segment,” and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter.
Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63
Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast AEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed.
Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow AEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed.
0: The amplitude transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity.
Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All
Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack Time.
Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 Time.
Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time.
Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release Time.
All: Time/Vel affects all AEG Time parameters.
Half Damper (Half Damper Switch)
When the Half Damper Switch is set to on, you can produce a “half-pedal” effect just as on a real acoustic
piano by using the optional FC3 Foot Controller connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the
rear panel.
Settings: off, on
Time (Half Damper Time)
Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released while holding down the Foot
Controller FC3 with the Half Damper Switch parameter turned on. This is not available when the Half
Damper Switch is set to off.
Settings: 0–127
NOTE For details on AEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
125
Reference
From the Amplitude Scale display you can make Amplitude Scale settings for each Element.
Amplitude Scale function controls the Amplitude output level according to the positions of the notes on the
keyboard.
Break Point 1–4
Determines the four Amplitude Scale Break Points by specifying their respective note numbers.
Settings: C -2 – G8
NOTE Break Points 1 to 4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard.
Level Offset 1–4
Determines the offset value of the level of each Amplitude Scale Break Point.
Settings: -128 – +127
NOTE For details on setting examples of the Amplitude Scaling, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF
document.
Scale (Amplitude Scale)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Amplitude] [Scale]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
126
Reference
From the Element LFO display you can make LFO related setting for each Element.
The Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) unit of the Element generates a low frequency signal. The signal from
the LFO can be used to modulate the pitch, filter, and amplitude.
LFO Wave
Selects the LFO waveform that is used to vary the sound.
Settings: Saw, Triangle, Square
Speed (LFO Speed)
Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. The larger the setting, the faster the speed.
Settings: 0–63
Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is played.
Settings: Off, On
Delay (LFO Delay Time)
Determines the delay time between the moment that a Note On message is received and the moment the
LFO comes into effect.
Settings: 0–127
Fade In (LFO Fade In Time)
Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the “Delay” time has elapsed).
Settings: 0–127
Element LFO
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Element LFO]
Saw (Sawtooth wave) Triangle (Triangle wave) Square (Square wave)
On
Time
Key on
Off
Time
Key on
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
127
Reference
Pitch Mod (LFO Pitch Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound.
Settings: 0–127
Filter Mod (LFO Filter Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff frequency.
Settings: 0–127
Amp Mod (LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or volume of
the sound.
Settings: 0–127
From the Element EQ display you can make EQ related settings for each Element.
EQ Type (Element EQ Type)
Determines the Equalizer Type.
Settings: 2-band, P.EQ (Parametric EQ), Boost6 (boost 6dB), Boost12 (boost 12dB), Boost18 (boost 18dB), Thru
2-band: This is a “shelving” equalizer, which combines separate high and low frequency bands.
P.E Q : The Parametric EQ is used to attenuate or boost signal levels (gain) around the Frequency.
Boost6, Boost12, Boost18: These can be used to boost the level of the entire signal by 6dB, 12dB and 18dB,
respectively
Thru: This setting bypasses the equalizers leaving the entire signal unaffected.
Element EQ
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Element EQ]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
128
Reference
When “EQ Type” is set to “2-band”
EQ Low Gain (Element EQ Low Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ Hi Gain (Element EQ High Gain)
Determines the level gain of the High band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ Low Freq (Element EQ Low Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Low band.
Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz
EQ Hi Freq (Element EQ High Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the High band.
Settings: 139.7Hz–12.9kHz
+
0
Low Freq
Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz
Gain
Frequency
High Freq
Settings: 139.7Hz–12.9kHz
Low Gain
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
High Gain
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
129
Reference
When “EQ Type” is set to “P.EQ”
EQ Gain (Element EQ Gain)
Determines the level gain of the frequency set in “EQ Freq.”
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
EQ Freq (Element EQ Frequency)
Determines the frequency to be attenuated/boosted.
Settings: 139.7Hz–12.9kHz
EQ Q (Element EQ Q)
This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics.
Settings: 0.7–10.3
NOTE For details on EQ structure, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
+
0
Frequency
Q
Settings: 0.7–10.3
Gain
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Freq
Settings: 139.7H–12.9kHz
Gain
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
130
Reference
Element All (All Element)
From the Oscillator display you can set Oscillator-related parameters for the eight Elements.
SW (Element Switch)
Determines whether each Element is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
XA Control
Determines the functioning of the Expanded Articulation (XA) feature of an Element.
The XA feature is sophisticated tone generator system that allows you to more effectively recreate realistic
sound and natural performance techniques. It also provides other unique modes for random and alternate
sound changes as you play. For details on the XA feature, see the “Tone Generator Block” in the “Basic
Structure” on page 6.
Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.SW1 On (Assignable Switch 1 ON), A.SW2 On (Assignable Switch 2
ON), A.SW Off (Assignable Switch 1 OFF)
Normal: The Element sounds normally each time you play the note.
Legato: When the Mono/Poly parameter is set to Mono, this Element will be played in place of the one which is set to
“Normal” of the XA Control parameter when you play the keyboard in legato fashion (playing the next note of a
single-note line or melody before releasing the previous note).
Key Off: The Element will sound each time you release the note.
Cycle: Each Element sounds alternately according to its numerical order. In other words, playing the first note will
sound Element 1, the second note Element 2, and so on.
Random: Each Element will sound randomly each time you play the note.
A.SW1 On: When the [ASSIGN 1] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW2 On: When the [ASSIGN 2] button is turned On, the Element will sound.
A.SW Off: When both of the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are turned Off, the Element will sound.
Group (Element Group)
Determines the group for XA Control. All Elements that have the same type of XA features must have the
same group number. This setting does not apply when the XA Control parameters of all Elements are set to
Normal.
Settings: 1–8
Waveform (Waveform Name)
Indicates the Waveform Name for each Element.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Osc (Oscillator)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection [All] [Osc]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
131
Reference
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will
respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first
specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range
covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.”
Settings: 1–127
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only
sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest
note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.”
Settings: C -2 – G8
From the Balance display you can set parameters related to Level, Pitch, and Pan for the eight Elements.
SW (Element Switch)
Determines whether each Element is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones.
Settings: -48 – +48
Fine (Fine Tune)
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element.
Settings: -64 – +63
Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the Cutoff Frequency for each Element.
Settings: 0–255
Pan (Element Pan)
Determines the stereo pan position for each Element.
Settings: L63 (far left)–C (center)–R63 (far right)
Level
Determines the level of each Element.
Settings: 0–127
Balance
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection [All] [Balance]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (AWM2) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Pitch
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Element
Osc / Tune
Pitch EG
Filter
Type
Filter EG
Scale
Amplitude
Level / Pan
Amp EG
Scale
Element LFO
Element EQ
All Element
Osc
Balance
Copy or Exchange
Elements
132
Reference
Copying or Exchanging Elements
You can copy or exchange between Elements.
NOTE Copying or exchanging between different Part types (for example, between Elements and Operators) cannot be
executed.
Copy
Touching this button activates the Copy function between Elements.
Exchange
Touching this button activates the Exchange function between Elements
Part to be copied (or exchanged)
NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed.
Element to be copied (or exchanged)
Copy (or exchange) destination Part
Copy (or exchange) destination Element
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Select Element to be copied [SHIFT] + [EDIT]
Copy
Exchange
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
133
Reference
Drum Part Edit
Each Drum Part can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys, assigned to notes spread across the keyboard (C0 to
C6). There are two types of Drum Part Edit displays: Key Common Edit display, for editing the settings that
apply to all Drum keys; and Key Edit display, for editing individual keys. This section explains the
parameters for Key Common Edit and Key Edit.
Key Common Edit (Common)
Part Category Main (Part Main Category)
Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category)
Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Part Name
Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
Volume (Part Volume)
Determines the output level of the selected Part.
Settings: 0–127
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part.
Settings: L63–C–R63
Dry Level
Determines the dry sound level (not effect applied) of the selected Part. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”
Settings: 0–127
Part Settings
General
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Drum Key [Common] [Part Settings]
[General]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
134
Reference
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”
Settings: 0–127
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part
Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.”
Settings: 0–127
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Determines which audio output is used for the selected Part.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off, Drum
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Drum: “Drum Key Out is displayed to determine the specific output for each Drum Key.
Note Shift
Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones.
Settings: -24 – +0 – +24
Detune
Determines the pitch settings of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments.
Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz
Pitch Bend / (Pitch Bend Range Upper/Lower)
Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones.
Settings: -48 – +0 – +24
Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only)
Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this
parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block.
Settings: Off, On
Element Pan (Element Pan Switch)
Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Key Part (made via [EDIT] Part selection
Drum Key selection [Level/Pan] “Pan”) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the pan position
for the each Key is set to center in the Part.
Settings: Off, On
Velocity Limit
Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond.
Settings: 1–127
Note Limit
Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part.
Settings: C -2 – G8
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
135
Reference
Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth)
Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the tone generator responds to your playing
strength. The higher the value, the more the volume changes in response to your playing strength (as
shown below).
Settings: 0–127
Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset)
Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This
lets you raise or lower all velocities based on this setting value—allowing you to automatically compensate
for playing too strongly or too softly.
Settings: 0–127
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 71).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 73).
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
127
0
127
When Offset (below) is set to 64:
Actual resulting
velocity
(affecting the
tone generator)
Velocity with which you play a note
Depth=127
Depth=64
Depth=32
Depth=0
127
012764
127
64
127
0
12764
127
0
Velocity with which you play a note Velocity with which you play a noteVelocity with which you play a note
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
Actual
resulting
velocity
(affecting
the tone
generator)
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 64
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 96
When Depth (above) = 64
and Offset = 32
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
136
Reference
Drum Key Connection Switch
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum Key, and which is
bypassed (Thru).
When the “Keyboard Select” is on, you can select Keys by playing the notes on the keyboard.
Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)
Insertion FX Switch
Determines whether or not Insertion Effect A / Insertion Effect B is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Effect Category)
Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Performances, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not available depending on the selected
Effect Type. For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display (page 76) of the Normal Part
(AWM2).
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off
Effect
Routing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Drum Key [Common] [Effect] [Routing]
Drum Key Connection Switch Insertion FX Switch
Insertion FX Switch
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
137
Reference
Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)
Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B.
Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA
RevSend (Reverb Send)
VarSend (Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Reverb/Variation effect. This is active only when the Part Output/Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Determines the specific output for the audio signal.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off, Drum
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Drum: “Drum Key Out is displayed to determine the specific output for each Drum Key.
Envelope Follower
Calls up the Envelope Follower Setting display.
Refer to the Routing display (page 76) for Normal Parts (AWM2).
InsRev (Insertion Reverb Send)
InsVar (Insertion Variation Send)
Determines the Send level for the entire Drum Part (all keys), sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb/
Variation effect.
This is active only when the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “InsA” or “InsB” and the Part Output/
Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
138
Reference
KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send)
KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send)
Determines the Send level for each Drum Key, sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb/Variation effect.
This is active only when the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “Thru” and the Part Output/Drum Key
Output is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127
Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select)
Determines the specific output for the individual Drum Key.
This is displayed only when the Part Output is set to “Drum.”
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
NOTE When the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “InsA” or “InsB,” this parameter is fixed to “MainL&R.”
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
139
Reference
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 82).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 85).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 87), except for the
additional parameter below.
Fixed SD/BD
When this parameter is set to On, C1 will be used as the note of the Bass Drum and D1 will be used as the
note of the Snare Drum in Arpeggio playback.
Settings: Off, On
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 88).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 91).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100), except for the
different setting values in the Destination parameter. For the setting value for “Destination,” see the “Control
List” in the Data List PDF document.
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 105).
Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
EQ (Part Equalizer)
Ins Assign (Insertion Assign)
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Common
Lane
Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)
Control Assign
Receive SW (Receive Switch)
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
140
Reference
Key Edit (Key)
From the Oscillator/Tune display you can set Oscillator-related parameters for each Key of the Drum Part.
Bank (Waveform Bank)
Number (Waveform Number)
Category (Waveform Category)
Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category)
Name (Waveform Name)
Indicates the information of the waveform used for the selected Drum Key. “Bank” indicates which
waveform location (Preset, User and Library) is assigned to the Key.
Settings: Refer to the Data List PDF document.
Drum Key Switch
Determines whether the currently selected Drum Key is used or not.
Settings: Off, On
Assign Mode (Key Assign Mode)
Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously, and without
corresponding note off messages.
Settings: Single, Multi
Single: Double or repeated playback of the same note is not possible. The first note will be stopped, then the next
note will be sounded.
Multi: All notes are sounded simultaneously. This allows playback of the same note when it is played multiple times
in succession (especially for tambourine and cymbal sounds that you would want to ring out to their full decay).
Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch)
Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum Key. The Insertion
Effect is bypassed if “Thru” is selected. This parameter is same as the “Connect” parameter in the
“Routing” display of Effect settings in Key Common Edit. Making a setting here automatically changes the
setting of that parameter as well.
Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B)
Osc/Tune (Oscillator/Tune)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Key selection [Osc/Tune]
Drum Key Switch
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
141
Reference
New Waveform
Loads Audio data stored in the USB flash drive as “Waveform.” For details on loading, see “Load”
(page 198).
After the Waveform is loaded, the Edit Waveform parameter will be available. For details on “Edit
Waveform,” see page 109.
Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Determines the pitch of each Drum Key Wave in semitones.
Settings: -48 – +48
Fine (Fine Tune)
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Drum Key Wave.
Settings: -64 – 63
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the pitch of the selected Drum key responds to velocity.
Settings: -64 – 63
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.
0: No change in pitch.
Rcv Note Off (Receive Note Off)
Select whether MIDI Note Off messages are received by each Drum Key.
Settings: off, on
Group (Alternate Group)
Set the Alternate Group to which the key is assigned. The Parts to which the same number is assigned
here cannot sound simultaneously. This setting helps to reproduce the sounds of a real drum kit, in which
some drum sounds cannot physically be played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats.
Settings: off, 1–127
KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send)
KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send)
Determines the level of the Drum key sound (the bypassed signal) that is sent to Reverb/Variation effect.
This is not available depending on the setting of the Drum Key Connection Switch.
Settings: 0–127
Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select)
Determines the specific output for the individual Drum Key.
This is not available depending on the settings of Drum Key Connection Switch or Part Output.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Keyboard Select (Keyboard Select Switch)
Determines whether or not the Keyboard Select setting is active or not. When this is set to on, you can
select Drum Keys by playing the notes on the keyboard.
Settings: Off, On
Drum Key
Indicates the selected Drum key.
Settings: C0–C6
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
142
Reference
From the Filter display you can apply filter settings to the Drum Part. These let you apply a low pass filter
and high pass filter to each individual Drum key.
Cutoff (Low Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)
Use this parameter to set the cutoff frequency for the low-pass filter.
Settings: 0–255
Cutoff/Vel (Low Pass Filter Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity)
Set the velocity sensitivity of the Low Pass Filter Cutoff frequency. Positive settings will cause the Cutoff
Frequency to rise the harder you play the keyboard. A negative setting will have the opposite effect.
Settings: -64 – +63
Resonance (Low Pass Filter Resonance)
Determines the amount of Resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the Cutoff Frequency.
Settings: 0–127
HPF Cutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency)
Determines the Cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter.
Settings: 0–255
Filter
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Key selection [Filter]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
143
Reference
From the Level/Pan display you can make Level and Pan settings for each Drum Key.
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Settings: Time: 0–127, Hold (only for Decay2)
Level: 0–127
Level
Determines the output level of the Drum Key. This lets you make detailed balance adjustments among the
various sounds of the Drum Key.
Settings: 0–127
Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the output level of the Drum Key responds to Velocity.
Settings: -64 – +63
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
0: The output level does not change.
Pan
Sets the pan position (stereo position) of each Drum Key. This will also be used as the basic Pan position
for the Alternate and Random settings.
Settings: L63 (far left)–C (center)–R63 (far right)
Level/Pan
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Key selection [Level/Pan]
Attack Decay1 Decay2
Time
Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time
Level
Decay1 Level
Decay2 Time = HoldDecay2 Time = 0–126
Level Level
Attack level Attack level
Decay1 level Decay1 level
Key on Key on
Attack
time
Attack
time
Decay1
time
Decay2
time
Decay1
time
Decay2
time
TimeTime
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Drum Part Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Control Assign
Receive SW
Key
Osc / Tune
Filter
Level / Pan
Element EQ
Copying or Exchanging
Drum Keys
144
Reference
Alternate Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum key is panned alternately left and right
for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position.
Settings: L64–C–R63
Random Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum Key is panned randomly left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position.
Settings: 0–127
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 127).
Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys
Same as “Copying or Exchanging Elements” for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 132).
Element EQ
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
145
Reference
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
A Normal Part (FM-X) can consist of up to eight Operators. There are two types of Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
displays: Operator Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Operators; and Operator
Edit display, for editing individual Operators.
Operator Common Edit (Common)
From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan.
Most parameters are the same as parameters on the Element Common Edit display for Normal Parts
(AWM2) (page 66) except the following additional parameters as bellows.
Random Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Operator is panned randomly left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the Center Pan position.
Settings: 0–127
Alternate Pan
Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Operator is panned alternately left and right for
each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the basic Pan position.
Settings: L64–C–R63
Scaling Pan
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan
position, left and right, of the selected Operator. At note C3, the main Pan setting is used for the basic Pan
position. Positive settings will cause the Pan position to be set left when you play in the lower range on the
keyboard and to be set right when you play in the higher range on the keyboard. A negative setting will
have the opposite effect.
Settings: -64 – +0 – +63
Part Settings
General
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Part Settings]
[General]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
146
Reference
KeyOnDly Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch)
Determines whether or not “Key On Delay Time Length” is synchronized to the tempo.
Settings: Off, On
Delay Length (Key On Delay Time Length)
Determines the time (or elapsed delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the
point at which the sound is actually played. You can set different delay times for each Operator. This is not
available when “KeyOnDly Sync” is set to on.
Settings: 0–127
Delay Length (Key On Delay Note Length)
Determines the timing of “Key On Delay” when “KeyOnDly Sync” is set to on.
Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot.
(dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note
triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5
(quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the
beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter
notes to the beat)
From the Algorithm display you can specify the Algorithm, which determines the arrangement of the
Operators and how the FM sound is generated.
Algorithm (Algorithm Number)
Changes Algorithms.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Feedback (Feedback Level)
Waveforms can be changed by feeding some of the signal generated by an operator back through that
operator. This allows you to set the feedback level.
Settings: 0–7
Algorithm
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Part Settings]
[Algorithm]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
147
Reference
Algorithm Search
Calls up the Algorithm Search display. From this display you can search for desired Algorithms by filtering
the number of Carriers, or the maximum length of the serial connection of Operators.
Chain
Filters the Algorithms by the maximum length of serial connection of Operators.
Settings: 1–8
Carrier
Filters the Algorithms by the number of Carriers.
Settings: 1–8
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 71).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 73).
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Algorithm list
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
148
Reference
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 68), except that the
Legato Slope parameter is not available.
From the Pitch EG/Scale display you can make all time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine
how the pitch of the sound changes over time, and the Scale for Parts.
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Settings: Time: 0–99
Level: -50 – +50
PEG Depth
Determines the pitch range for Pitch EG.
Settings: 8 oct, 2 oct, 1 oct, 0.5 oct
Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the pitch range will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play
notes on the keyboard.
Settings: 0–7
Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG
Times. The Center Key (C3) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter.
Settings: 0–7
Positive values: High notes result in a high PEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
Pitch/Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale (Pitch EG/Scale)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Pitch/Filter]
[PEG/Scale]
Initial Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release
Time
Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time
Level
Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
149
Reference
Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes), assuming the pitch
of the Center Key (below) as standard.
Settings: -200% – +0% – +200%
+100% (the normal setting): Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart.
0%: All notes have the same pitch as the Center Key.
Negative values: The settings are reversed.
Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key)
Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch.
Settings: C -2 – G8
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the pitch responds to velocity.
Settings: -64 – 63
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.
0: No change in pitch.
Random Pitch (Random Pitch Depth)
Allows you to randomly vary the pitch for each note played.
Settings: 0–127
NOTE For details on PEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 113).
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 118).
Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 120).
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
150
Reference
From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for Parts.
Insertion FX Switch
Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Effect Category)
Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected Effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determines the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not active depending on Effect Types.
For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display (page 76) of the Normal Part (AWM2).
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off
Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)
Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram
in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect
connection” (page 20) of the “Basic Structure.”
Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA
Effect
Routing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Effect] [Routing]
Insertion FX Switch
Insertion FX Switch
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
151
Reference
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb effect.
Settings: 0–127
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Variation effect.
Settings: 0–127
Part Output (Part Output Select)
Determines the specific audio output.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2...USB7&8, USB1...USB8, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 82).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 85).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 87).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 88).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 91).
Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
EQ (Part Equalizer)
Ins Assign (Insertion Assign)
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Common
Lane
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
152
Reference
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 96), except that the
setting values of the Destination parameter differ and that “Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase
Offset)” is not available. For details on the setting values, see the Data List PDF document.
LFO Wave (2nd LFO Waveform)
Selects the 2nd LFO waveform.
Settings: Triangle, Saw Down, Saw Up, Square, Sine, S/H
NOTE When “Sine” is selected, two waves will be shown in the diagram on the display because of the phase shift of
the Amplitude Modulation wave.
Key On Reset (2nd LFO Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the 2nd LFO is reset each time a note is pressed.
Settings: Off, On
Speed (2nd LFO Speed)
Adjusts the speed (frequency) of the 2nd LFO variation.
Settings: 0–99
Phase (2nd LFO Phase)
Determines the starting phase point for the 2nd LFO Wave when it is reset.
Settings: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°
Delay (2nd LFO Delay Time)
Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the 2nd
LFO comes into effect.
Settings: 0–99
Mod/Control (Modulation/Control)
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Mod/Control]
[2nd LFO]
Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio
(2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)
Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio
(2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
153
Reference
Pitch Modulation (2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound.
Settings: 0–99
Amplitude Modulation (2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or
volume of the sound.
Settings: 0–99
Filter Modulation (2nd LFO Filter Modulation Depth)
Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff
frequency.
Settings: 0–99
Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio
(2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)
Adjusts the amount (depth) which is determined in the “2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth” for each
Operator.
Settings: 0–7
Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio
(2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio)
Adjusts the amount (depth) which is determined in the “2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth” for each
Operator.
Settings: 0–7
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100), except for the
different setting values in the Destination parameter. For details on the setting value, see the Data List PDF
document.
Also the following parameter is shown on this display.
Operator SW (Operator Switch)
Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Operator (On) or not (Off). This is available only
when an Operator-related parameter is set in “Destination.”
Settings: Off, On
Control Assign
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Mod/Control]
[Control Assign]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
154
Reference
Operator Rate
Determines the sensitivity of the Controller in changing the parameter set in “Destination” for each
Operator.
This is available only when “Destination” is set to “OP Freq” or “OP AEG Offset.”
Settings: Off, On
SW/Rate (Operator Switch/Operator Rate Switch)
Switches displays between “Operator Switch” and “Operator Rate.”
This is available only when “Destination” is set to “OP Freq” or “OP AEG Offset.”
Settings: Off, On
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 105).
Receive SW (Receive Switch)
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
155
Reference
Operator Edit (Operator)
From the Form/Frequency display you can make all the waveform and frequency settings for Operators.
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Settings: Time: 0–99
Level: -50 – +50
Spectral (Spectral Form)
Determines the “spectral form” of the selected Operator.
Settings: Sine, All 1, All 2, Odd 1, Odd 2, Res 1, Res 2
Skirt (Spectral Skirt)
Determines the spread of the “skirt” at the bottom of the formant harmonics curve. Higher values produce
a wider skirt and smaller values produce a narrower skirt. This is not available when “Spectral” is set to
“Sine.”
Settings: 0–7
Resonance (Spectral Resonance)
Determines the degree to which velocity affects the Resonance of the Spectral Form. The center frequency
moves to higher frequencies, letting you create a special resonance in the sound. This is active only when
“Spectral” is set to “Res 1” or “Res 2.”
Settings: 0–99
Form/Freq (Form/Frequency)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator selection [Form/Freq]
Initial Attack Decay
Time
Attack Time Decay Time
Level
Initial Level Attack Level
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
156
Reference
Basic waveforms used as Operators contain harmonics, with the exception of “Sine.” A sine wave contains
its fundamental frequency with no additional harmonics. Therefore, when “Form” is set to any waveform
other than “Sine,” you can adjust harmonics and the peak of each formant, depending on the Waveform
Type by determining the related parameters. Below are the basic waveforms and the characteristic
parameters.
The larger the “Skirt” value, the more harmonics the wave contains.
The larger “Resonance” value, the higher frequency the center frequency is moved.
• Resonance=0: The Center frequency is the basic wave
• Resonance=99: The Center frequency is the 100th harmonic
Key On Reset (Oscillator Key On Reset)
Determines whether or not the oscillation of the Operator is reset each time a note is pressed.
Settings: Off, On
Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the pitch of the selected Operator responds to velocity. This is available only when “Freq
Mode” is set to “Fixed.
Settings: -7 – +7
Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises.
Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls.
0: No change in pitch.
Freq Mode (Oscillator Frequency Mode)
Determines the settings for the Output Pitch of the Operator.
Settings: Ratio, Fixed
Ratio: Determines the Output Pitch by detecting the note you play on the keyboard.
Fixed: Specifies the Pitch by setting “Coarse” and “Fine.”
Level
Level
Level
Level
Skirt
Skirt
Skirt
Skirt
Center Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Center Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Center Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Center Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Frequency
(Hz)
Frequency
(Hz)
Frequency
(Hz)
Frequency
(Hz)
Level
Skirt
Center Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Frequency
(Hz)
Resonance of
Center Frequency
Level
Skirt
Center Frequency
(F.Coarse & Freq Fine)
Frequency
(Hz)
Resonance of
Center Frequency
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
157
Reference
Coarse (Coarse Tune)
Determines the pitch of each Operator.
Settings: When “Freq Mode” is set to “Ratio”: 0–31
When “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed”: 0–21
Fine (Fine Tune)
Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Operator.
Settings: When “Freq Mode” is set to “Ratio”: 0–99
When “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed”: 0–127
Detune
Sets the Output Pitch of the Operator slightly higher or lower.
Even if the same parameter value is set for both “Coarse Tune” and “Fine Tune,” the Detune lets you
slightly raise or lower the pitch of each Operator, allowing you to add an extra dimension to the sound and
enhance the spatial characteristics.
Settings: -15 – +15
Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the degree depending on their position or octave
range). This is available only when “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed.”
Settings: 0–99
0: All notes are the same pitch specified by Coarse and Fine.
99: Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart.
From the Level display you can make all the volume settings for the Operator.
The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display.
Settings: Time: 0–99
Level: 0–99
Level (Operator Level)
Determines the output level of the Operator.
Settings: 0–99
Level
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator selection [Level]
Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release
Time
Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time
Level
Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release (Hold) Level
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Normal Part (FM-X) Edit
Common
Part Settings
General
Algorithm
Zone Settings
Zone Transmit
Pitch / Filter
Pitch
PEG/Scale
Filter Type
Filter EG
Filter Scale
Effect
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Ins Assign
Arpeggio
Common
Individual
Advanced
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Mod / Control
Part LFO
2nd LFO
Control Assign
Receive SW
Operator
Form / Freq
Level
Copy or Exchange
Operators
158
Reference
Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity)
Determines how the output level of the Operator responds to Velocity.
Settings: -7 – +7
Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises.
0: The output level does not change.
Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity)
Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude
EG Times.
Settings: 0–7
Positive values: High notes result in a fast Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed.
0: The Amplitude EG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note.
Break Point
Determines the Amplitude Scale Break Points by specifying their respective note numbers.
Settings: A-1 – C8
Curve Lo (Low Curve)
Curve Hi (High Curve)
Determines the curve for Amplitude scaling.
Settings: -Linear, -Exp, +Exp, +Linear
Lvl/Key Lo (Low Depth)
Lvl/Key Hi (High Depth)
Determines the curve degree of the curve (above).
Settings: 0–99
The keyboard is divided in two at the break point.
The high-pitch side at the right is set by using the R Depth and the R Curve; the low-pitch side at the left is
set by using the L Depth and the L Curve as described below.
The Output level of the Key set as the Break Point depends on the Operator Level setting. For the Keys in
the left side of the Break Point, the Output level is adjusted based on the curve which is determined by the
Low Curve and Low Depth. For the Keys in the right side of the Break Point, the Output level is adjusted
based on the curve which is determined by the High Curve and High Depth. The Output level changes in
an exponential fashion from the Break Point on the Exp type curve and the Output level changes in a linear
fashion from the Break Point in the Linear type curve. In either case, the farther away from the Break Point
the key is, the greater the Output level changes for the key.
Copying or Exchanging Operators
Same as “Copying or Exchanging Elements” for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 132).
+
-
+exp +exp+linear +linear
-exp-linear
-exp
-linear
Output Level
Low Depth
Low Curve High Curve
High Depth
Key
Break Point Output Level
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
159
Reference
Common/Audio Edit (Common/Audio)
A Performance consists up to 16 Parts. You can set the parameters related to the entire Performance and
the Audio Parts in the Common/Audio Edit display.
From the General display you can set various parameters for the Performance.
Performance Name
Determines the selected Performance name. Performance names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
Motion Control Flag
Determines whether or not to add the “Motion Control” attribute to the selected Performance. When this is
set to on, the “MC” icon is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 27). The Performance can be
filtered as “MC” in the Performance Category Search display (page 176).
Settings: Off, On
Tg Flag (Tone Generator Flag)
Shows the attribute by the Tone Generator of the selected Performance. The name icon of the selected
Tone Generator is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 27). The Performance can be filtered
as “AWM2/FM/AWM2+FM-X” in the Performance Category Search display (page 176).
Settings: AWM2, FM-X, AWM2+FM-X
Volume (Performance Volume)
Determines the output volume of the selected Performance.
Settings: 0–127
Pan
Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance.
Settings: L63–C–R63
Var Return (Variation Return)
Determines the return level of the Variation effect.
Settings: 0–127
General
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [General]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
160
Reference
Rev Return (Reverb Return)
Determines the return level of the Reverb effect.
Settings: 0–127
Audition Phrase Bank
Selects an Audition Phrase Bank.
Audition Phrase Number
Determines the Audition Phrase Number. You can hear a sample of the selected Performance sounds that
is called “Audition phrase.” The best matching Audition Phrase is assigned to each Preset Performance in
advance.
Settings: 1–1093
Note Shift (Audition Phrase Note Shift)
Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for the Audition Phrase in semitones.
Settings: -24semi – +24semi
Velocity Shift (Audition Phrase Velocity Shift)
Determines the velocity of the Audition Phrase.
Settings: -63 – +63
Portamento Master SW (Portamento Master Switch)
Determines whether Portamento is applied to the Part or not when the “Portamento Part SW” is set to on for
the Part.
Settings: Off, On
Portamento Time
Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied.
Settings: -64 – +63
Assign 1 Mode/Assign 2 Mode (Assignable Switch 1 Mode/Assignable Switch 2 Mode)
Determines whether the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons functions as a latch type or momentary type.
Settings: Latch, Momentary
Latch: When set to “Latch,” pressing the button alternates the status between on and off.
Momentary: When set to “Momentary,” pressing/holding the button turns on and releasing the button turns off.
MS Hold Mode (Motion Sequencer Hold Mode)
Determines how the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button responds when pressed.
Settings: Latch, Momentary
Latch: When set to “Latch,” pressing the button alternates the status between on and off.
Momentary: When set to “Momentary,” pressing/holding the button turns on and releasing the button turns off.
Update User Auditions
Converts all of the songs recorded on the MODX to User Auditions. If the User Auditions already exist, all
User Auditions will be overwritten.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
161
Reference
From the Mixing display you can adjust the volume settings of the Audio Part (the input signal from the A/D
INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks) and the Digital Part (the input signal from the [USB TO HOST] terminal*).
* Only the sound of the Port which, among all Device Ports, is set to “Digital L/R.”
A/D In Input Mode/Digital In Input Mode (A/D Part Input Mode/Digital Part Input Mode)
Determines the signal configuration for the A/D Part/Digital Part, or how the signal or signals are routed
(stereo or mono).
Settings: L Mono, R Mono, L+R Mono, Stereo
L Mono: Only the L channel is used.
R Mono: Only the R channel is used.
L+R Mono: The L and R channels are mixed and processed in mono.
Stereo: Both the L and R channels are used.
NOTE The sound input only from the [L/MONO] channel is processed in mono.
Volume (A/D Part Volume/Digital Part Volume)
Determines the output level of the A/D Part/Digital Part.
Settings: 0–127
Pan (A/D Part Pan/Digital Part Pan)
Determines the stereo pan position of the A/D Part/Digital Part.
Settings: L63–C–R63
Dry Level (A/D Part Dry Level/Digital Part Dry Level)
Determines the level of the A/D Part/Digital Part which has not been processed with the System Effect. This
is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Settings: 0–127
Var Send (A/D Part Variation Send / Digital Part Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part signal sent to the Variation effect. This is available
only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R,” and for the A/D Part, “Global A/D” is set to “OFF.”
Settings: 0–127
Audio In
Mixing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Audio In] [Mixing]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
162
Reference
Rev Send (A/D Part Reverb Send/Digital Part Reverb Send)
Determines the Send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part signal sent to the Reverb effect. This is available
only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R,” and for the A/D Part, “Global A/D” is set to “OFF.”
Settings: 0–127
Output Select (A/D Part Part Output Select/Digital Part Part Output Select)
Determines the specific output(s) for the individual A/D Part/Digital Part signal.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2USB7&8, USB1USB8, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for the A/D Part.
Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch)
Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Effect Category)
Type (Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected Effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed
settings.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document.
Routing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Audio In] [Routing]
Insertion FX Switch
Insertion FX Switch
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
163
Reference
Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determines the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator.
This is not available depending on the Effect Type.
For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display of the Normal Part (AWM2) (page 76).
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off
Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type)
Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram
in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect
connection” (page 20) of the “Basic Structure.”
Settings: Ins AB, Ins BA
Rev Send (Reverb Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R” and “Global A/D” is set to
“OFF.”
Settings: 0–127
Var Send (Variation Send)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the
Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R” and “Global A/D” is set to
“OFF.”
Settings: 0–127
Envelope Follower
Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. For details, see the Routing display (page 76) of Normal
Part (AWM2) Edit. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.”
Output Select (Part Output Select)
Determines specific audio output.
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, AsgnL, USB1…USB8, Off
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Off: No audio signal for the Part is output.
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77).
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78) except that “3-band
EQ” is inactive.
Ins A (Insertion Effect A)
Ins B (Insertion Effect B)
EQ (Equalizer)
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
164
Reference
From the Common display you can set the parameters related to Motion Sequencer commonly used for all
Parts in Common/Audio Part.
Common Clock Swing (Common Swing)
Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset
value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part.
Settings: -120 – +120
Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply)
Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance.
This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for the Part is set to “Common.”
By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one.
Settings: 50%–400%
200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved.
100%: The normal playback time.
50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled.
Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time)
Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value
for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100 – +100
Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate)
Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the
Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part.
Settings: -100 – +100
Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude)
Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines
how the entire Motion Sequence changes.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in
the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer)
Common
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Motion Seq] [Common]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
165
Reference
Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape)
Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step
curve shape of the sequence.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on
for the parameter).
Settings: -100 – +100
Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness)
Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the
degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane
Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness
setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane).
Settings: -64 – +63
Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to
which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed.
This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane.
Settings: -64 – +63
Random (A/D Part Motion Sequencer Random)
Determines the degree of random change in the Step Value of the Motion Sequence for the A/D Part is. For
details about “Random,” see “Quick Edit” on page 38.
Settings: 0–127
Sync Part (Motion Sequencer Sync Part)
Determines the Part for synchronizing to the Motion Sequencer. The Motion Sequencer is synchronized to
the Note On setting and the Arp/Motion Seq Grid setting of the specified Part.
Settings: Part 1–Part 16
Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid)
Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is
displayed in clocks. For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. This setting is applied
to the Part which is selected as the Sync Part (above).
Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 91).
Lane
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
166
Reference
Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100), except for the
following parameters.
Destination
When “Source” is set to “AsgnKnob 1–8,” “Part 1–16 Assign 1–8” are added as this parameter values. In
this case, “Curve Type” and “Curve Ratio” are not selectable.
Settings: See the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document.
Source
When “Destination” is set to “Part 1–16 Assign 1–8,” only “AsgnKnob 1–8” can be set for this parameter.
Settings: AsgnKnob 1–8, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst
Display Filter
Determines the Controller to be displayed. When “Super Knob” is selected, all Assignable Knob settings in
which “Super Knob Link” is set to On are displayed.
Settings: AsgnKnob 1–8, Super Knob, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst, All
The following parameters are displayed only when “Destination 1–16” is set to “Part 1–16 Assign 1–8.”
Also, when Destination is not set to any Assignable Knobs for the Part, only the shortcut buttons are
available.
Destination
Determines the controller settings for the Part to be displayed.
Settings: 1–16 (The number of Destinations for the Assignable Knobs for the Part which is selected in “Destination 1–16” is
displayed.)
Parameter
Determines the parameters for the Part to be controlled.
Settings: Refer to the “Control List” in the Data List.
Control
Control Assign
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Control] [Control Assign]
or
Touch [Edit Super Knob] in the Super Knob display.
Touching the “+” button adds a Part parameter to be used as a control target.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
167
Reference
Edit Part Control Settings
Calls up the Control Assign display for the currently selected Part.
Curve Type
Determines the specific curve for changing the parameter which is set in “Destination.” The horizontal axis
indicates the value of the controller set in “Source” and the vertical axis indicates the parameter values.
Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt
Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold
For User Bank: User 1–32
When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1–8
Polarity (Curve Polarity)
Determines the Curve Polarity of the Curve type set in “Curve Type.”
Settings: Uni, Bi
Uni: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction or in a negative direction from a base parameter value according
to the Curve shape.
Bi: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value.
Ratio (Curve Ratio)
Determines the Curve Ratio.
Settings: -64 – +63
Determines the MIDI Control Change numbers common for the entire system. You can use the Knobs on
the front panel and external controllers by assigning appropriate MIDI Control Change numbers. When the
same control number is assigned to the Super Knob and any Assignable Knob, the Super Knob takes
priority and operation of the Assignable Knob may be ignored. A warning message appears in that case.
NOTE External controllers include external sequencers and external MIDI controllers.
NOTE The Control Number set in this display is stored as Performance data. However, “FS Assign,” “Super Knob CC”
and “Scene CC” are stored as general system settings, and not as Performance data.
Ribbon Ctrl (Ribbon Controller Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number received from an external device with a Ribbon Controller.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from an external device, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Ribbon
Controller.
Settings: Off, 1–95
Control Number
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Control] [Control Number]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
168
Reference
Breath Ctrl (Breath Controller Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number received from the external equipment such as a Breath Controller.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
Breath Controller.
Settings: Off, 1–95
Foot Ctrl 1/Foot Ctrl 2
(Foot Controller 1 Control Number/Foot Controller 2 Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using a Foot Controller connected to the FOOT
CONTROLLER [1] /[2] jack.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Foot
Controller.
Settings: Off, 1–95, Super Knob
Assign SW 1/Assign SW 2
(Assignable Switch 1 Control Number/Assignable Switch 2 Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button
(Assignable Switch 1/2).
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
[ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button (Assignable Switch 1/2.)
Settings: Off, 1–95
MS Hold (Motion Sequencer Hold Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion
Sequencer Hold) button.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
[MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion Sequencer Hold) button.
Settings: Off, 1–95
MS Trigger (Motion Sequencer Trigger Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion
Sequencer Trigger) button.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
[MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion Sequencer Trigger) button.
Settings: Off, 1–95
Assign Knob 1–8 (Assignable Knob 1–8 Control Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the Assignable Knob 1–8.
Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here
from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the
Assignable Knob 1–8.
Settings: Off, 1–95
MIDI Settings
Calls up the MIDI I/O display in Utility.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
169
Reference
From this display you can determine the System Effect and Master Effect connections that commonly
affect all Parts.
Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Switch
Determines whether Variation/Reverb/Master Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Category)
Type (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Preset)
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Variation/Reverb/Master Effect type, designed to
be used for specific applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Variation/Master Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Variation/Master Effect.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off
Var Return (Variation Return)
Rev Return (Reverb Return)
Determines the return level of the Variation/Reverb effect.
Settings: 0–127
Effect
Routing
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Effect] [Routing]
Reverb Switch
Variation Switch
Master Effect Switch
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
170
Reference
Var Pan (Variation Pan)
Rev Pan (Reverb Pan)
Determines the pan position of the Variation/Reverb effect.
Settings: L63 (far left)–C (center)–R63 (far right)
Var to Rev (Variation to Reverb)
Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Variation Effect to the Reverb Effect.
Settings: 0–127
Master EQ (Master Equalizer Switch)
Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Envelope Follower
Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. See the Routing display (page 75) for the Normal Part
(AWM2).
From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Variation effect.
Variation Switch
Determines whether the Variation effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Variation Category)
Type (Variation Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset (Variation Preset)
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.
Variation
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Effect] [Variation]
Variation Switch
Effect Parameter
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
171
Reference
Side Chain/Modulator (Variation Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Variation Effect.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off
Effect Parameter
Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for
each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Reverb effect.
Reverb Switch
Determines whether the Reverb effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Reverb Category)
Type (Reverb Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset (Reverb Preset)
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.
Effect Parameter
Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for
each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Reverb
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Effect] [Reverb]
Reverb Switch
Effect Parameter
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
172
Reference
From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Master Effect.
Master Effect Switch
Determines whether the Master Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Category (Master Effect Category)
Type (Master Effect Type)
Determines the category and type for the selected effect.
Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the
description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Preset (Master Effect Preset)
Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific
applications and situations.
Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document.
Side Chain/Modulator (Master Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part)
Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Master Effect.
This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part.
Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off
Effect Parameter
Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect
parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for
each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document.
Master FX (Master Effect)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Effect] [Master FX]
Master Effect Switch
Effect Parameter
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
173
Reference
From this display you can set parameters related to the Master EQ.
Master EQ Switch
Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Low Gain (Master EQ Low Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High Mid band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
High Gain (Master EQ High Gain)
Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High band.
Settings: -12dB – +12dB
Low Freq (Master EQ Low Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Master Low band.
Settings: 32Hz–2.0kHz
Master EQ (Master Equalizer)
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Effect] [Master EQ]
Master EQ Switch
Low Shape High Shape
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
174
Reference
Lo Mid Freq (Master EQ Low Mid Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Master Low Mid band.
Settings: 100Hz–10kHz
Mid Freq (Master EQ Mid Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Master Mid band.
Settings: 100Hz–10kHz
Hi Mid Freq (Master EQ High Mid Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Master High Mid band.
Settings: 100Hz–10kHz
High Freq (Master EQ High Frequency)
Determines the frequency for the Master High band.
Settings: 500Hz–16kHz
Low Q (Master EQ Low Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Low band. This is available only when the Master EQ Low
Shape (below) is set to “Peak.”
Settings: 0.1–12.0
Lo Mid Q (Master EQ Low Mid Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Low Mid band.
Settings: 0.1–12.0
Mid Q (Master EQ Mid Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Mid band.
Settings: 0.1–12.0
Hi Mid Q (Master EQ High Mid Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master High Mid band.
Settings: 0.1–12.0
High Q (Master EQ High Q)
Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master High band. This is available only when the Master EQ High
Shape (below) is set to “Peak.”
Settings: 0.1–12.0
Low Shape (Master EQ Low Shape)
High Shape (Master EQ High Shape)
Determines whether the equalizer type used is Shelving or Peaking. The Peaking type attenuates/boosts
the signal at the specified Frequency setting, whereas the Shelving type attenuates/boosts the signal at
frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting. This parameter is available only for the LOW
and HIGH frequency bands.
Settings: Shelf (Shelving Type), Peak (Peaking Type)
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio
MODX Reference Manual
Common/Audio Edit
Common/Audio
General
Audio In
Mixing
Routing
Ins A
Ins B
EQ
Motion Seq
Common
Lane
Control
Control Assign
Control Number
Effect
Routing
Variation
Reverb
Master FX
Master EQ
USB Monitor
175
Reference
From the USB Monitor display, you can adjust the Audio Input level from the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
NOTE USB Main Monitor Volume is stored as Performance Data.
USB Main Monitor Volume
Adjusts the Audio signal level which is input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal and output to the OUTPUT
[L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Settings: 0–127
Audio Settings
Calls up the Audio I/O display in Utility.
USB Monitor
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [USB Monitor]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
176
Reference
Category Search
The Performances/Arpeggios/Waveforms are conveniently divided into specific Categories. The
categories are divided based on the general instrument type or sound characteristics. The Category
Search function gives you quick access to the sounds you want.
The Favorite function has been added, giving you quick access to desired sounds and Arpeggios.
NOTE You can filter the Performance List by Favorite in the Part Category Search and in the Performance Merge, but
you cannot turn the Favorite icon on/off from the search displays.
Performance Category Search
From the Performance Category Search display you can search and select the Performance.
In case of Performance Category Search
Bank/Favorite (Performance Bank Select/Favorite)
Filters the Performance List by Bank or Favorite. When Favorite is selected, only Performances having a
Favorite icon are listed.
Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)
NOTE When the Category Search display is selected, pressing the [CATEGORY] button repeatedly switches Banks
among All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library (when the Library file is read). Holding down the [CATEGORY] button
lets you go back to All.
Attribute (Performance Attribute)
Filters the Performance List by Attribute (page 159). This is not available for Part Category Search.
Settings: All, AWM2, FM, AWM2+FM-X, MC, SSS, Single, Multi
Name Search (Performance Name Search)
Searches the Performance by inputting a part of the Performance Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [CATEGORY] (Performance Category Search)
or
Touch the Performance Name Select [Category Search] from the displayed menu
Name Search
Performance list
Favorite icon
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
177
Reference
Main (Performance Main Category)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Sub (Performance Sub Category)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Audition (Audition Switch)
Determines whether the Audition phrase is played back or not. This is not available when “Audition Lock”
(page 193) is set to on in the Utility display.
Settings: Off, On
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Performance List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.
Favorite Set / Unset
Enters (Sets) or cancels (Unsets) the Favorite icon to the currently selected Performance. This is not
available when the cursor is not on the Performance List.
NOTE You can also set/unset the Favorite icon from the menu which is displayed by touching the Performance name
on the Performance Play (Home) display.
Favorite All Clear
Clears all Favorite icons on Performances. This is available only when at least one Performance has a
Favorite icon.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
178
Reference
In case of Part Category Search
You can select any Part in a Performance and assign the sound of the Part to another.
When “Mixing” of the “Parameter with Part” (Param. with Part) setting is set to off, you can change sounds
continuously, using the current setting values for the Part such as Volume, Pan and Note shift.
When the selected Part and all succeeding Parts have no sound assigned (or are empty), executing the
operation above opens the Performance Merge display.
Source
Determines which Part of the selected Performance will be assigned to the Performance being edited.
Settings: Part 1–16
Solo (Solo Switch)
Determines the Solo function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this is set to on and any sound is assigned to
the Part, only the Part will be sounded.
Settings: Off, On
Param. with part (Parameter with Part)
Determines whether or not to read and use the parameter values for the next Performance. When the set of
parameters is set to off, the current setting values are continuously used even when the next Performance
is selected.
The “Zone” parameter is available only when “Zone Master” (page 193) is set to on in the Utility display.
Settings: Off, On
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] (When the Part to which any sounds are assigned is selected) Select
the Part Name [SHIFT]+[CATEGORY] (Part Category Search)
or
(When the Part to which any sounds are assigned is selected) Touch the Part Name Select
[Category Search] from the displayed menu
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
179
Reference
Performance Merge
From the Performance Merge display, you can collectively assign multiple Parts from the selected
Performance to empty Parts in the Performance currently being edited. For example, you can merge four
Piano Parts in one Performance and two Strings Parts in another Performance to create even more richly
textured, layered sounds.
This allows you to separately mute original Parts and newly added Parts.
Source
Determines which Part of the selected Performance will be assigned to the Performance being edited.
Settings: All, Part 1–16
All: All non-empty Parts of the selected Performance are assigned to available empty Parts.
Part 1–16: Only the sound from the specified Part is assigned to the selected Part.
Original Part Mute
When set to OFF, all of the Parts existed before adding any Parts in the Performance Merge display will be
muted.
Settings: Off, On
Additional Part Mute
When set to OFF, only the Part added in the Performance Merge display will be muted.
Settings: Off, On
Operation
[PERFORMANCE (HOME)] (the selected Part and all Parts that follow must not be assigned)
[SHIFT] + [CATEGORY] or touch the “+” icon
Original Part Mute
Additional Part Mute
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
180
Reference
Arpeggio Category Search (Arp Category Search)
From the Arpeggio Category Search display you can search and select Arpeggio Types.
Bank/Favorite (Performance Bank Select/Favorite)
Filters the Performance List by Bank or Favorite. When Favorite is selected, only Performances having a
Favorite icon are listed.
Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)
When the Category Search display is selected, pressing the [CATEGORY] button repeatedly switches Banks among
All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library (when the Library file is read). Holding down the [CATEGORY] button lets you go
back to All.
Name Search (Arpeggio Name Search)
Searches for an Arpeggio by inputting a part of the Arpeggio Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Main (Arpeggio Category)
Settings: See the Arpeggio Category List (page 11).
Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category)
Settings: See the Arpeggio Sub Category List (page 11).
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Arpeggio Type List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Date: Sorts in order of loading. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer
to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.
Favorite Set / Unset
Enters (Sets) or cancels (Unsets) the Favorite icon to the currently selected Performance. This is not
available when the cursor is not on the Performance List.
Operation
Arpeggio related display Part selection [CATEGORY]
Name Search
Arpeggio Type list
Favorite icon
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
181
Reference
Favorite All Clear
Clears all Favorite icons on Performances. This is available only when at least one Performance has a
Favorite icon.
Page (Page Select)
When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
182
Reference
Waveform Category Search (Waveform Search)
From the Waveform Category Search display you can search and select the Waveforms.
Bank/Favorite (Performance Bank Select/Favorite)
Filters the Performance List by Bank or Favorite. When Favorite is selected, only Performances having a
Favorite icon are listed.
Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)
When the Category Search display is selected, pressing the [CATEGORY] button repeatedly switches Banks among
All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library (when the Library file is read). Holding down the [CATEGORY] button lets you go
back to All.
Name Search (Waveform Name Search)
Searches for a Waveform by inputting a part of the Waveform Name.
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Main (Waveform Category)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Sub (Waveform Sub Category)
Settings: See the Data List PDF document.
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Waveform List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.
Favorite Set / Unset
Enters (Sets) or cancels (Unsets) the Favorite icon to the currently selected Performance. This is not
available when the cursor is not on the Performance List.
Operation
Waveform related display Part selection Waveform selection [CATEGORY]
Name Search
Waveform list
Favorite icon
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
183
Reference
Favorite All Clear
Clears all Favorite icons on Performances. This is available only when at least one Performance has a
Favorite icon.
Page (Page Select)
When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
184
Reference
Rhythm Pattern
Use this function to add and set up a Drum Part.
Bank/Favorite (Rhythm Pattern Bank Select)
Filters the Rhythm Pattern List by Bank or Favorite.
Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read)
Name Search (Rhythm Pattern Name Search)
Searches the Rhythm Patterns by inputting a part of the Rhythm Pattern Name.
Original Part Mute
When set to OFF, all of the Parts existed before adding any Parts in the Rhythm Pattern display will be
muted.
Settings: Off, On
Additional Part Mute
When set to OFF, only the Part added in the Rhythm Pattern display will be muted.
Settings: Off, On
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Rhythm Pattern List.
Settings: Default, Name, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order.
Page (Page Select)
When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.
Cancel
Touching this button or pressing the [RHYTHM PATTERN] button cancels the selection and closes the
Rhythm Pattern display.
Operation
[RHYTHM PART]
Rhythm Pattern List
Name Search
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
185
Reference
Arpeggio Tab
Arp Category (Arpeggio Category)
Arp Sub Category (Arpeggio Sub Category)
Arp Name (Arpeggio Name)
Arp Select (Arpeggio Select)
Same as the Individual display for Arpeggio (page 85).
Tempo
Determines the Rhythm Part tempo.
Settings: 5–300
Volume
Determines the Rhythm Part volume.
Settings: 0–127
Arpeggio Tab
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Search
Performance Category
Arp Category
Waveform
Rhythm Pattern
186
Reference
Envelope Follower Tab
Envelope Follower Switch
Determines whether the Envelope Follower is used (on) or not (off).
Settings: Off, On
Envelope Follower Gain
Same as the parameter in the Envelope Follower display (page 21).
Edit
Opens the Envelope Follower setting display.
Destination
Settings: Volume, Cutoff, Resonance, Pitch, Pan, Reverb Send, Variation Send, LFO Speed, LFO Depth 1, LFO Depth 2, LFO
Depth 3
Curve Type
Curve Polarity
Curve Ratio
Same as the parameters in the Control Assign display (page 100).
Curve Parameter 1
Curve Parameter 2
Settings: 0–127
NOTE This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type.
Envelope Follower Tab
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
187
Reference
Utility
The Utility display has four tabs; the Setting tab, the Contents tab, the Tempo Settings tab, the Effect
Switch tab, and the Other Info tab. You can make various settings for the entire system.
From the Sound display you can make overall settings for the sounds output from the instrument.
Tone Generator Volume
Determines the overall volume of the instrument.
Settings: 0–127
Tone Generator Note Shift
Determines the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch of all notes is shifted.
Settings: -24semi – +24semi
Tone Generator Tune
Determines the fine tuning of the instrument’s overall sound (in 0.1 cent steps).
Settings: -102.4 – +102.3
Sustain Pedal (Foot Switch Sustain Pedal Select)
Selects the Foot switch type connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the rear panel.
When the FC3 or FC3A is used:
When you connect an optional FC3 or FC3A (equipped with the half-damper feature) for producing
the special “half-damper” effect (as on a real acoustic piano), set this parameter to “FC3A (Half on).”
If you don’t need the half-damper feature or want to disable it while still using an FC3 or FC3A, set
this parameter to “FC3A (Half off).”
When the FC4, FC4A, or FC5 is used:
Select “FC4A/FC5.” The FC4, FC4A, and FC5 are not equipped with the half-damper feature.
Settings: FC3A (Half On), FC3A (Half Off), FC4A/FC5
NOTE Note that this setting is not necessary when controlling the half-damper feature via Control Change messages
from an external MIDI device to the instrument.
Settings
Sound
Operation
[UTILITY] [Settings] [Sound]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
188
Reference
Keyboard Octave Shift
Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down. This
parameter is linked with the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons on the panel.
Settings: -3 – +3
Keyboard Transpose
This parameter is used to transpose the current zone in units of one semitone.
Settings: -11semi – +11semi
NOTE If you transpose beyond the note range limits (C -2 – G8), notes in the adjacent octaves will be used.
Keyboard Velocity Curve
These five curves determine how the actual velocity will be generated and transmitted according to the
velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. The graph shown in the display indicates
the velocity response curve. (The horizontal line represents the received velocity values (strength of your
playing), while the vertical line represents the actual velocity values transmitted to the internal/external
tone generators.)
Settings: Normal, Soft, Hard, Wide, Fixed
Normal: This linear “curve” produces one-to-one correspondence between the strength of your keyboard playing (velocity)
and the actual sound change.
Soft: This curve provides increased response, especially for lower velocities.
Hard: This curve provides increased response, especially for higher velocities.
Wide: This curve accentuates your playing strength by producing lower velocities in response to softer playing and louder
velocities in response to harder playing. As such, you can use this setting to expand your dynamic range.
Fixed: This setting produces the same amount of sound change (set in Keyboard Fixed Velocity below), no matter what your
playing strength. The velocity of the notes you play are fixed at the value set here.
Keyboard Fixed Velocity
The Fixed curve can be used to send a fixed velocity to the tone generator regardless of how hard or soft
you play the keyboard. This parameter is only available if you select the “Fixed” Keyboard Velocity Curve
above.
Settings: 1–127
Using Quick Setup can instantly call up appropriate sequencer-related panel settings by selecting
convenient preset setups, allowing you to simultaneously and instantly set a variety of important
sequencer-related parameters.
Quick Setup
Operation
[UTILITY] [Settings] [Quick Setup],
or
[SHIFT] + [UTILITY],
or
Touch the QUICK SETUP icon
QUICK SETUP icon
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
189
Reference
Audio Signal Flow
Indicates the Audio signal connections. The connections will change depending on the status of the [USB
TO HOST] terminal and the general settings of the instrument.
MIDI Signal Flow
Indicates the MIDI signal connections. The connections will change depending on the general settings of
the instrument.
Quick Setup
Determines the Quick Setups.
Settings: Standalone, 1–3
The parameters for Quick Setups are as follows.
For details about parameters related to Audio Settings, see “Audio I/O” (page 190). For details about
parameters related to MIDI Settings, see “MIDI I/O” (page 191).
The default settings for Quick Setups are as follows.
Standalone
Use this setting when this instrument is to be used alone or as the master clock source for other
equipment.
MIDI Rec on DAW
Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance (not including Arpeggio data) to the
DAW software.
Arp Rec on DAW
Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance including Arpeggio data to the DAW
software.
Audio Settings
A/D Input Gain
L&R Gain
USB L&R Gain
USB 1–8 Gain
Direct Monitor Switch
MIDI Settings
MIDI In/Out
Local Control
Arp MIDI Out
MIDI Sync
Clock Out
Receive/Transmit Sequencer Control
Controller Reset
FS CC Number
Super Knob CC Number
Scene CC Number
Part Output Settings
Part 1–16 Output Select
A/D In Output Select
Digital In Output Select
Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out
On On Main L&R Off
Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out
Off On Main L&R Off
Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out
Off On Main L&R On
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
190
Reference
Audio Rec on DAW
Use this setting when recording the signals from the tone generator and the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R]
jacks separately to DAW software, and playing the signals from the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks
directly.
The Output settings for Individual are as follows.
Store Current Settings
Stores the edited settings as 1–3 of “QuickSetup.”
From the Audio I/O display you can set the parameters related to Audio Input and Output.
A/D Input (A/D Input Gain)
When using the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks, this determines the input source, microphone (Mic) or
Line.
Settings: Mic, Line
Mic: Intended for low output equipment, such as a microphone.
Line: Intended for high output equipment, such as a keyboard, synthesizer, or CD player.
NOTE A guitar or bass having active pickups can be directly connected. However, when using passive pickups,
connect the instrument via an effect device.
Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out
On Off Depends on the Part Off
Part 1 Output Select Main L&R
Part 2 Output Select USB 1&2
-- --
Part 5 Output Select USB 7&8
-- --
Part 16 Output Select Main L&R
A/D In Output Select Main L&R
Digital In Output Select Main L&R
Audio I/O
Operation
[UTILITY] [Settings] [Audio I/O]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
191
Reference
Main L&R (Main L&R Output Gain)
Determines the output gain of the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB
USB Main (USB Main L&R Output Gain)
Determines the output gain of the Main L&R channel of the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB
USB 1-8 (USB 1–8 Output Gain)
Determines the output gain of 1–8 channels of the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB
Direct Monitor (Direct Monitor Switch)
Determines whether or not the audio signal which is output to the external device via the “Main L&R,” “USB
Main” or “USB 1-8” channels also sounds from this instrument (Direct Monitoring). When this is set to “on,”
the audio signal which is output via the “Main L&R,” “USB Main” or “USB 1-8” channels is also output to the
OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks and [PHONES] jack. When the external device is not connected via USB
cable, the Direct Monitor Switch is automatically turned on.
Settings: Off, On
Monitor Volume
Opens the USB Monitor setting display (page 175).
From the MIDI I/O display you can set parameters related to MIDI Input and Output.
You can control the Super Knob or switch Scenes by Control Change messages.
MIDI IN/OUT
Determines which physical output/input terminal(s) will be used for transmitting/receiving MIDI data.
Settings: MIDI, USB
NOTE The two types of terminals above cannot be used at the same time. Only one of them can be used to transmit/
receive MIDI data.
MIDI Thru
Determines whether the MIDI [OUT] terminal will be used as a MIDI Thru terminal or not.
Settings: Off, on
MIDI I/O
Operation
[UTILITY] [Settings] [MIDI I/O]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
192
Reference
Local Control
This determines whether or not the tone generator of the instrument responds to your keyboard playing.
Normally, this should be set to “on”—since you’ll want to hear the sound of the instrument as you play it.
Even if this is set to “off,” the data will be transmitted via MIDI. Also, the internal tone generator block will
respond to messages received via MIDI.
Settings: Off, On
Arp MIDI Out (Arpeggio MIDI Out)
Determines whether to output MIDI data of Arpeggio playback or not.
Settings: Off, On
MIDI Sync
You can set various parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization here.
Determines whether Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer/Song playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s
internal clock, an external MIDI clock, or the Audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In
Internal: Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or
as the master clock source for other equipment.
MIDI: Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the
external sequencer is to be used as master.
A/D In: Synchronization to the tempo of the Audio signal received via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Clock Out
Determines whether MIDI clock messages will be transmitted via MIDI or not.
Settings: Off, On
Receive (Receive Sequencer Control)
Determines whether the Sequencer Control signals—start and stop of Song—will be received via MIDI or
not.
Settings: Off, On
Transmit (Transmit Sequencer Control)
Determines whether the Sequencer Control signals—start and stop of Song—will be transmitted to MIDI or
not.
Settings: Off, On
Hold/Reset (Controller Hold/Reset)
Determines the status of the controllers (Modulation Wheel, Aftertouch, Foot Controller, Breath Controller,
Knobs, etc.) when switching between Performances. When this is set to “Hold,” the controllers are kept at
the current setting. When this is set to “Reset,” the controllers are reset to the default states (below).
Settings: Hold, Reset
If you select “reset,” the controllers will be reset to the following states/positions:
FS Assign (Foot Switch Assign Control Number)
Determines the Control Change number generated by using the Foot switch connected to the FOOT
SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack. Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control
Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is
generated by using the Foot switch.
Settings: Off, 1–95, Arp SW, MS SW, Play/Stop, Live Set+, Live Set-, Oct Reset
Pitch Bend Center
Modulation Wheel Minimum
Aftertouch Minimum
Foot Controller Maximum
Foot Switch Off
Ribbon Controller Center
Breath Controller Maximum
Expression Maximum
Assignable Switches 1 and 2 Off
Motion Sequencer Hold Off
Each Lane of Motion Sequencer 0 (minimum) when Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity is set to “Unipolar”
64 (center) when Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity is set to “Bipolar”
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
193
Reference
Super Knob CC (Super Knob Control Change Number)
Determines the Control Change number generated by using the Super Knob. Even when the instrument
receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external
equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by using the Super Knob. When “MIDI
I/O Mode” is set to “Multi,” Channel 1 is used for transmitting MIDI data. When “MIDI I/O Mode” is set to
“Single,” the channel specified in “MIDI I/O Ch.” is used for transmitting MIDI data.
Settings: Off, 1–95
NOTE When this parameter is set to off, MIDI data is transmitted by SysEx (System Exclusive) messages.
Scene CC (Scene Control Change Number)
Determines the Control Change Number generated by switching Scenes. Even when the instrument
receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external
equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by switching Scenes.
Settings: Off, 1–95
NOTE Scene 1–8 is selected depending on the Control Change value.
0–15: Scene 1, 16–31: Scene 2, 32–47: Scene 3, 48–63: Scene 4, 64–79: Scene 5, 80–95: Scene 6, 96–111:
Scene 7, 112–127: Scene 8
NOTE When the same Control Change Number is set to both of the Super Knob Control Change and the Scene Control
Change, an exclamation mark (!) is shown before the value. In such a case, changes to Scene Control have
priority and changes to the Super Knob Control are ignored.
Control Number
Calls up the Control Number display in the Common/Audio Edit.
From the Advanced display you can set the advanced parameters. Data communication between this
instrument and an external device using only the specified MIDI channel is also available.
Zone Master (Zone Master Switch)
Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off).
Settings: Off, On
Audition Lock
Determines whether the Audition Lock is active or not. When this is set to On, the Audition function is not
available.
Settings: Off, On
Advanced
Operation
[UTILITY] [Settings] [Advanced]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
194
Reference
MIDI I/O Mode
Determines which MIDI I/O mode is used for data communication between this instrument and an external
device.
Settings: Multi, Single
Multi: Transmits MIDI data such as Note On/Off messages for each Part.
Single: Transmits MIDI data using only the channel specified in “MIDI I/O Ch.”
MIDI I/O Ch. (MIDI I/O channel)
Determines the MIDI channel to be used for data communication when “MIDI I/O Mode” is set to “Single.”
Settings: Ch1–16
When this parameter is set to “Single,” Arpeggio data is not transmitted to the external device. When the Zone
function is active, the Zone setting for the Performance is given priority over the “MIDI I/O Mode” setting. You can see
which setting is active from the MIDI Signal Flow in the MIDI I/O display.
Device Number
Determines the MIDI Device Number. This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI
device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other System Exclusive messages.
Settings: 1–16, All, Off
Bank Select
This switch enables or disables Bank Select messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is
set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Bank Select messages.
Settings: Off, On
Pgm Change (Program Change)
This switch enables or disables Program Change messages, both in transmission and reception. When
this is set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Program Change messages.
Settings: Off, On
Receive Bulk
Determines whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received.
Settings: Protect (not received), On (received)
Bulk Interval
Determines the interval time of the Bulk Dump transmission when a Bulk Dump Request is received.
Settings: 0ms–900ms
Event Chase (Song Event Chase)
Event Chase allows you to specify which non-note data types are properly recognized during fast-forward
and rewind operations. Setting this to a specific event ensures the playback integrity of the event, even
when fast forwarding or rewinding.
Settings: Off, PC (Program Change), PC+PB+Ctrl (Program Change+Pitch Bend+Control Change)
Init On Boot (Initialize User Data on Boot-up)
Determines whether the User Data is initialized (On) or not (Off) when the power of the instrument is turned
on.
Settings: Off, On
Initialize Advanced Settings
Initializes the system settings edited in the Advanced display.
NOTICE
When the Initialize operation is executed, the target data and system settings you edited will be erased. Make
sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to your USB flash drive before
executing this procedure.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
195
Reference
From the System display you can make global system settings for the instrument.
Power on Mode
Determines the start-up display (which is automatically called up when power is turned on).
Settings: Perform, Live Set
Auto Power Off
To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that
automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. This
parameter determines the amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off.
Settings: Off, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120min
Initial Live Set Bank
Initial Live Set Page
Initial Live Set Slot
Selects the Live Set Bank, Page and Slot for the start-up display, for when the Power on Mode is set to
“Live Set.
Settings: Bank: Preset, User1–User8, Library1–Library8
Page: 1–16
Slot: 1–16
Set Current Slot
Sets the currently selected Live Set Bank, Page and Slot to be displayed at startup.
Animation (Animation Switch)
Determines whether the animation of screen transition is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On
Blur (Blur Switch)
When any display is selected, the display previously selected is blurred. This parameter determines
whether the Blur function is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On
System
Operation
[UTILITY] [Settings] [System]
MODX Firmware version
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
196
Reference
Beep (Beep Switch)
Determines whether the beep sound (that confirms operations, menu/parameter selection, etc.) is turned
on or off.
Settings: Off, On
Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Switch)
Determines whether the flashing function of the Super Knob is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On
KnobBrightness (Knob Brightness)
Controls the brightness of the lighting of the Super Knob.
Settings: 0–128
Half Glow (LED Half Glow Brightness)
Controls the dimming of the button lamps.
Settings: Off, 1/4, 1/2
Calibrate Touch Panel
Calls up the Calibration display for the Touch Panel. Calibration of the touch panel may be necessary if the
touch panel does not respond correctly.
Initialize All Settings
Initializes all system settings you created on the Utility display.
Initialize User Data
Initializes User data (Performance, Motion Sequence, and Live Set) in the specified area of User memory.
Initialize All Data
Initializes all User data in the User memory and all system settings you created on the Utility display.
NOTICE
When the Initialize operation is executed, all target data and system settings you created will be erased. Make
sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to your USB flash drive before
executing this procedure.
MODX Firmware Version
Shows the version of the firmware installed on your MODX.
Live Set Font (Live Set Font Size)
Determines the font size of the contents name on the Live Set display and the Category Search display.
Settings: Normal, Large
Live Set display
•Normal
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
197
Reference
•Large
Category Search display
•Normal
•Large
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
198
Reference
From the Load display you can load files and data.
Content Type
Among the various types of data saved in a single file on a USB flash drive or this instrument, you can load
all of them to this synthesizer at once or only a specific, desired type of data. This parameter determines
which specific type of data will be loaded from a single file. The editable parameters differ depending on
how you arrive at this display.
Settings: The file types which can be loaded as follows.
Contents
Load
Operation
[UTILITY] [Contents] [Load]
File Types Device Type Extension Description
User File File .X8U
.X7U
Files of the “User File” type saved to USB flash drive can be
loaded and restored to the dedicated area in the User Memory
of the instrument (page 23).
User File Type data is as follows.
Performance
•Arpeggio
Motion Sequence
•Curve
•Live Set
Micro Tuning
Waveform
Utility settings
Quick Setup
•Audition
Library File File .X8L
.X7L
Files of the “Library File” type saved to USB flash drive can be
loaded and restored to the dedicated area in the User Memory
of the instrument (page 23).
Library File Type data is as follows.
Performance
•Arpeggio
Motion Sequence
•Curve
•Live Set
Micro Tuning
Waveform
•Audition
Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Free Storage
Folder/File select
Import Option
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
199
Reference
NOTE Files with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when you call up this display from the Utility display.
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Indicates the Parent Folder name and the current selected Folder Name. Once you touch the Parent Folder
Name, the Folder becomes the currently selected folder.
Free Storage
Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area.
This parameter differs depending on the Content Type.
Folder/File Select
Indicates Folders/Files in the selected Folder.
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Files in “File Select.”
Settings: Name, Size, Date, Number
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to
big.) When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is not available for “Motion Seq,”
“Song,” and “Song&Perf” type Files.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is available only for “Motion
Seq,” “Song,” and “Song&Perf” type Files.
Number: Sorts in order of Content Number. This is available only for “Song” and “Song&Perf” type Files.
Import Option
With the MOTIF XF, MOTIF, XS, or MOXF files, you can set the file to be loaded as Performance or Voice.
Settings: Voice, Perf
Page (Page Select)
When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.
Backup File File .X8A Data that is saved to USB flash drive as a backup file can be
loaded to the User Memory again. A backup file includes all
User data, Library data, and Song data.
NOTE .X7A format (MONTAGE backup files) is not
supported.
Song&Perf Internal data A specified Song in a file that is saved to the dedicated area in
the User Memory as a “Song” type can be individually
selected and loaded (played back) to the instrument. Both of
MIDI sequence and Performance data can be loaded.
Song Internal data A specified Song in a file that is saved to the dedicated area in
the User Memory as a “Song” type can be individually
selected and loaded (played back) to the instrument. Only
MIDI sequence data can be loaded.
.mid File File .MID Standard MIDI File (SMF in format 0, 1) data that is saved to
USB flash drive can be loaded and played back.
.wav File File .WAV Audio data (Wave File) that is saved to USB flash drive can be
loaded and played back.
Audio File* File .WAV
.AIF
Audio data (Wave File and AIFF File) that is saved to USB flash
drive can be loaded and as “Waveform.”
Example: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part
selection Element selection [Osc/Tune] “New
Waveform
Motion Seq* Internal data A specified Sequence data in a file that is saved to the
dedicated area in the User Memory as an “Motion Seq” type
can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument.
Example: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part
selection Element/Operator [Common] [Motion Seq]
[Lane] “Load Sequence”
File Types Device Type Extension Description
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
200
Reference
Job (Job Switch)
Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this parameter is turned on, touching
the File/Folder/Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.”
Touching the currently connected USB device calls up the menu to select “Format.”
Settings: Off, On
Compatible with the MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 data
The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/
MONTAGE8 data. Note that .X7U files are loaded only as “User Files” and that .7L files are loaded only as
“Library Files.”
Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file.
NOTE The .X7A format (MONTAGE backup files) is not supported.
Compatible with the MOTIF XF6/MOTIF XF7/MOTIF XF8 data
The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MOTIF XF6/MOTIF XF7/MOTIF
XF8 data. Please note that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.”
Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file.
Compatible with the MOTIF XS6/MOTIF XS7/MOTIF XS8 data
The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MOTIF XS6/MOTIF XS7/MOTIF
XS8 data. Please note that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.”
Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file.
Compatible with the MOXF6/MOXF8 data
The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MOXF6/MOXF8 data. Please note
that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.”
Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file.
File Type on MONTAGE Extension on MONTAGE Contents
User File .X7U User File
Library File .X7L Library File
File Type on MOTIF XF Extension on MOTIF XF Contents
All .X3A User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform
AllVoice (All Voice) .X3V User Voice, User Waveform
AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X3G User Arpeggio
AllWaveform (All Waveform) .X3W User Waveform
File Type on MOTIF XS Extension on MOTIF XS Contents
All .X0A User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform
AllVoice (All Voice) .X0V User Voice, User Waveform
AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X0G User Arpeggio
AllWaveform (All Waveform) .X0W User Waveform0
File Type on MOXF Extension on MOXF Contents
All .X6A User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform
AllVoice (All Voice) .X6V User Voice, User Waveform
AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X6G User Arpeggio
AllWaveform (All Waveform) .X6W User Waveform
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
201
Reference
From the Store/Save display you can store Files and data.
Content Type
You can store all data or the specified data to the instrument or USB flash drive. This parameter determines
which specific data will be stored/saved.
The editable setting value differs depending on how you arrive at this display.
Settings: The Content Types which can be stored/saved are as follows.
Store/Save
Operation
Press the [STORE] button
or
[UTILITY] [Contents] [Store / Save]
File Types Device Type Extension Description
Performance Internal data Data can be stored to the dedicated area in the User Memory
as a “Performance” (page 23).
User File File .X8U Data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User Memory
can be saved to USB flash drive.
Data saved as “User File” is as follows.
Performance
•Arpeggio
Motion Sequence
•Curve
•Live Set
Micro Tuning
Waveform
Utility Settings
Quick Setup
•Audition
Library File File .X8L Data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User Memory
can be saved to USB flash drive.
Data saved as “Library File” is as follows.
Performance
•Arpeggio
Motion Sequence
•Curve
•Live Set
Micro Tuning
Waveform
•Audition
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Free Storage
File select
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
202
Reference
NOTE Files with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when you call up this display from the Utility display.
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Indicates the parent folder name and the current selected folder name. Once you touch the Parent Folder
Name, the Folder becomes the currently selected folder.
Free Storage
Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending
on the Content Type.
Folder/File Select
Indicates folders/files in the selected folder.
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the sort order of the files in “File Select.”
Settings: Name, Size, Date
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the list is arranged in descending order.
Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to
big.) When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is not available for
“Performance” and “Motion Seq” type files.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is available only for
“Performance” and “Motion Seq” type files.
Page (Page Select)
When files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.
Job (Job Switch)
Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this parameter is turned on, touching
the File/Folder/Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.”
Touching the currently connected USB device calls up the menu to select “Format.”
Also you can create a new folder when storing a file.
Settings: Off, On
Backup File File .X8A Data that is saved to USB flash drive as a backup file can be
loaded to the User Memory again.
A backup file includes all User data, Library data, and Song
data.
.mid File File .MID MIDI data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User
Memory (page 23) can be saved as a Standard MIDI File (only
Format 0 SMF) to USB flash drive.
Motion Seq* Internal data Data can be stored as “Motion Seq” to the dedicated area in
the User Memory.
Example: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part
selection Element/Operator [Common] [Motion Seq]
[Lane] “Edit Sequence” to call up “Motion Sequence Edit”
“Store Sequence”
File Types Device Type Extension Description
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
203
Reference
From the Data Utility display you can control Files and data in the User Memory. Also, you can collectively
delete multiple contents such as Performances in the User Memory.
Folder List
Current Folder Name
Indicates the Current Folder Name.
Job (Job Switch)
Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off). This parameter is available only for the
“Waveform” folder on this display. When the parameter is turned on, touching “Waveform” folder calls
up the menu to select “Optimize.” When this function is active, you can select multiple contents
collectively from this display.
Settings: Off, On
Folder Select
Indicates the Content Types in the User Memory as folders. Touching the Folder opens it.
Arp (Arpeggio)
•Library
•Live Set
Motion Seq
Performance
•Song
Waveform
Page (Page Select)
When folders in “Folder Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to
scroll through the pages.
Data Utility
Operation
[UTILITY] [Contents] [Data Utility]
Folder select
Current Folder Name
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
204
Reference
When the selected Folder is opened
When this function is active, you can select multiple contents collectively from this display.
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Indicates the parent folder name and the current selected folder name. Touching the parent folder name
returns to the folder list view.
Free Storage
Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending
on the Content Type. This parameter is displayed only when “Job” is set to OFF.
File Select
Indicates Files in the selected Folder. The Job function is always available in this display. Touching the File/
Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.” (“Rename” is not available for
the Files in “Library” type Folder.)
Sort (Sort Order)
Determines the Sort Order of the Files in “File Select.”
Settings: Name, Size, Date, Number
Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the
upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order.
Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to
large). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is available only for “Library”
type Contents.
Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to
older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is not available for “Arp” and
“Library” type Contents.
Number: Sorts in order of Content Number. This is available only for “Arp,” “Song,” and “Waveform” type Contents.
Select All
Selects all contents in the folder. This button is displayed only when no content is selected.
Unselect All
Unselects all contents in the folder. This button is displayed only when any of contents is selected.
Delete
Deletes the selected content(s). This button is displayed only when any of contents is selected.
Parent Folder Name
Current Folder Name
Free Storage
File Select
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
205
Reference
Page (Page Select)
When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through
the pages.
You can select a desired Performance in the Library file which is loaded to the User Memory and copy the
Performance to the User Bank.
Library Folder List
Library Folder Select
Indicates the Libraries as folders. Touching the Folder opens it. These folders are displayed only when
Library files are loaded in the Load display.
Library Import
Operation
[UTILITY] [Contents] [Library Import]
Library Folder Select
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
206
Reference
When the selected Library Folder is opened
Performance Select
Indicates the Performances in the selected Library. Touching the name switches between being selected
or unselected.
Select All
Selects all Performances in the selected Library folder. This button is displayed only when no Performance
is selected.
Unselect All
Unselects all Performances in the Library folder. This button is displayed only when any of Performances is
selected.
Import to User Bank
Copies the selected Performance in the User Bank. User Waveforms and User Arpeggio which are used in
the selected Performance are copied to the User Bank as well. This button is displayed only when any of
the Performances is selected.
Performance Select
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
207
Reference
From the Tempo Settings display you can set parameters related to Tempo and Synchronization.
Tempo
Determines the Performance tempo. This parameter is not available when the “MIDI Sync” is set to “MIDI”
or “A/D In” and the instrument is synchronized to an external device (“EX. Tempo” is displayed instead of
the setting value.)
Settings: 5–300
Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Switch)
Determines whether the flashing of the Super Knob is turned on or off.
Settings: Off, On
Global Tempo (Global Tempo Switch)
When this switch is set to OFF, the tempo setting changes when a different Performance is selected. When
this switch is set to ON, the current tempo is used for all Performances.
Settings: Off, On
Tap Tempo
Allows you to tap the desired tempo by touching this parameter or by moving the cursor to this parameter
and pressing (tapping) the [ENTER] button on the panel.
This parameter is not displayed when the “MIDI Sync” is set to “MIDI” and the instrument is synchronized
to an external device.
NOTE When “MIDI Sync” is set to “A/D In,” the tempo search starts by touching this parameter.
Tempo Settings
Operation
[UTILITY] [Tempo Settings]
or
[SHIFT] + [ENTER]
or
Touch the TEMPO SETTING icon
TEMPO SETTING icon
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
208
Reference
MIDI Sync
Determines parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization.
Determines whether Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer/Song playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s
internal clock, an external MIDI clock, or the Audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In
Internal: Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or
as the master clock source for other equipment.
MIDI: Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the
external sequencer is to be used as master.
A/D In: Synchronization to the tempo of the Audio signal received via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
Clock Out
Determines whether MIDI clock messages will be transmitted or not.
Settings: Off, On
Mode (Click Mode)
Determines the click sound (metronome) that is used during recording or playback.
Settings: Off, Rec, Rec/Play, Always
Off: The click will not sound.
Rec: The click will sound during Song recording only.
Rec/Play: The click will sound during Song recording and playback.
Always: The click will always sound.
Precount (Click Pre-count)
Determines the number of count-in measures provided before recording actually starts after pressing the
[ ] (Play) button while the Song recording.
Settings: Off (Recording starts as soon as the [ ] (Play) button is pressed), 1meas–8meas
NOTE Since the click sound is created with the internal tone generator, using click playback affects the overall
polyphony of the instrument.
Volume (Click Volume)
Determines the click sound volume.
Settings: 0–127
Beat (Click Beat)
Determines which beats the metronome click will sound.
Settings: 1/16 (16th notes), 1/8 (8th notes), 1/4 (quarter notes), 1/2 (half notes), Whole (whole notes)
Type (Click Type)
Determines the click sound type.
Settings: 1–10
Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value)
Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the
Arpeggio of multiple Parts is played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you
trigger it. The displayed number indicates the resolution in clocks.
Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet),
480 (1/4 note)
Click Out (Click Output Select)
Determines the specified output for the “Click.”
Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8
MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks.
USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal.
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
209
Reference
From the Effect Switch display you can make Effect Bypass settings. None of the settings made on this
display will be stored. When the instrument is restarted, the parameter values are also initialized.
Insertion FX (Insertion Effect Switch)
Determines whether the Insertion Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
System FX (System Effect Switch)
Determines whether the System Effect is active or not.
Settings: Off, On
Master FX (Master Effect Switch)
Determines whether the Master Effect is active or not. This parameter is automatically switched off when
Global A/D is ON, and switched on when Global A/D is OFF. Set this switch manually when needed.
Settings: Off, On
Master EQ Switch
Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not. This parameter is automatically switched OFF when
Global A/D is set to ON, and switched ON when Global A/D is set to OFF. Set this switch manually when
needed.
The Master EQ Switch settings are not stored.
Settings: Off, On
Arp Bypass (Arpeggio Bypass Switch)
Determines whether the Arpeggio Bypass is active or not. When this is set to on, all Arpeggiator operations
are disabled.
Settings: Off, On
NOTE Arpeggio Bypass can also be turned on/off by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and using the
[ARP ON/OFF] button. The [ARP ON/OFF] button flashes when Arpeggio Bypass is turned on.
NOTE When the Part Arpeggio Switch setting is changed, Arpeggio Bypass is automatically turned off even if it has
been set to on.
NOTE You can edit arpeggios in Song data generated by the arpeggiator with using DAW software. By turning
Arpeggio Bypass on, you can prevent Song data edited on the DAW software from being affected again by the
arpeggiator when routed back to the MODX.
Effect Switch
Operation
[UTILITY] [Effect Switch]
or
Touch the EFFECT icon
EFFECT icon
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
210
Reference
Kbd Ctrl Lock (Keyboard Control Lock)
Determines whether Keyboard Control Lock is active or not. When this is set to on, the Keyboard Control is
turned on only for Part 1 and off for the other Parts.
When this is set to off, Keyboard Control settings for all Parts are returned to the original status.
Settings: Off, On
NOTE When you use the MODX as a 16-part multi-timbral sound module with DAW software, the Keyboard Control
Lock function is useful for creating or editing MIDI tracks one by one.
Global A/D
Determines whether the volume for the A/D Part changes when you switch the Performances.
When this parameter is ON, the volume for the A/D Part stays the same, and other parameters related to
the A/D Part do not change. When set to OFF, the volume changes according to the volume set in each
Performance, and other parameters related to the A/D Part change accordingly.
The Global A/D settings are not stored.
Settings: Off, On
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Uitlity
Settings
Sound
Quick Setup
Audio I/O
MIDI I/O
Advanced
System
Contents
Load
Store / Save
Data Utility
Library Import
Tempo Settings
Effect Switch
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
211
Reference
Shows other information.
Shows the Shift Function List.
Shows legal notices such as the GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE.
Other Info
Shift Function
Legal Notices
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Live Set
Live Set
Edit
Register
212
Reference
Live Set
Live Set is a list in which Performances can be freely arranged. Up to 16 Performances can be selected
from the Preset Live Sets and arranged over a single page—making it easy to call up and play your
favorite Performances. For basic instructions on Live Set, see the Owner’s Manual.
Live Set
From the Live Set display you can call up the registered Performances.
Bank (Live Set Bank Select)
Determines the Live Set Bank.
Settings: Preset, User 1–8 (default), Library Name (when the Library file is read)
Page (Live Set Page Select)
Determines the Live Set Page.
Settings: Live Set page 1–16 (default)
Performance List
Indicates the Performances registered in the selected Live Set.
Category Search
Calls up the Performance Category Search display (page 176).
Current Performance Name
Indicates the selected Performance Name registered in the selected slot.
Current Slot Name
Indicates the selected Slot Name.
Performance Attribute
Indicates the Performance Attribute registered in the selected Slot.
Operation
Press the [LIVE SET] button,
or
Touch the LIVE SET icon
Performance List
Current Performance Name
Current Slot Name
Performance Attribute
LIVE SET icon
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Live Set
Live Set
Edit
Register
213
Reference
Live Set Edit (Edit)
From the Live Set Edit display you can edit the Live Sets (User Bank only).
When the Slot to which a Performance has been registered is selected
Bank (Live Set Bank Name)
Enters the desired name for the selected Live Set Bank. The names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
Page (Live Set Page Name)
Enters the desired name of the selected Live Set Page. The names can contain up to 20 characters.
Touching the parameter calls up the input character display.
Done
Touching this parameter finishes the Live Set Editing and returns to the Live Set display.
Performance List
Indicates the Performances registered in the selected Live Set.
Delete
Deletes the Performance from the selected Slot.
Slot Name
Enters the desired name of the selected Slot. The names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the
parameter calls up the input character display.
Performance (Performance Name)
Indicates the Performance Name in the selected Slot.
Color
Determines the Color of the selected Slot.
Settings: Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Azure, Pink, Orange, Purple, Sakura, Cream, Lime, Aqua, Beige, Mint, Lilac
Volume
Determines the volume of the Performance in the selected Slot.
Operation
[LIVE SET] User Bank selection [EDIT]
Performance List
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Live Set
Live Set
Edit
Register
214
Reference
Swap (Swap Switch)
Determines whether the Swap function is turned on or off. You can switch settings between Slots. For
instructions on the Swap function, see the Owner’s Manual.
Settings: Off, On
Copy (Copy Switch)
Determines whether the Copy function is turned on or off. You can copy the setting to another Slot.
Settings: Off, On
When an empty Slot is selected
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Live Set
Live Set
Edit
Register
215
Reference
Copying or Exchanging Live Sets
You can copy (or exchange) between Live Sets on a Bank or page basis.
NOTE Page copy (or exchange) between different Banks cannot be executed.
Copy
Touching this button activates the Bank/Page Copy function.
Exchange
Touching this button activates the Bank/Page Exchange function.
Bank to be copied (or exchanged)
NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed.
Page to be copied (or exchanged)
Copy (or exchange) destination Bank
Copy (or exchange) destination Page
Operation
[LIVE SET] User Bank selection [EDIT] Select Bank/Page to be copied [SHIFT] + [EDIT]
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
Live Set
Live Set
Edit
Register
216
Reference
Live Set Register (Register)
From the Live Set Register display you can register Performances to the Live Set. For basic instructions on
Live Set Registering, see the Owner’s Manual.
Bank (Live Set Bank Select)
Determines the Live Set Bank for registering Performances. Preset Bank and Library Bank cannot be
selected for this parameter.
Settings: User 1–8 (default)
Page (Live Set Page Select)
Determines the Live Set Page for registering Performances.
Settings: Live Set Page 1–16 (default)
Slot Select
Determines the Slot for registering Performance. When the Slot containing the Performance is selected
and press the [ENTER] button (or touch the Slot again on the display), the Performance in the slot is
replaced with the currently selected Performance.
Settings: Slot 1–16
Operation
[SHIFT] + [LIVE SET] (from any operation displays, other than Live Set)
Slot Select
Edit Search Utility Live SetPerformance
MODX Reference Manual
iPhone/iPad connection
217
Reference
Connecting an iPhone or iPad
NOTE In order to eliminate the risk of noise from other communication when using this instrument with an iPad or
iPhone app, be sure to turn on Airplane Mode and then turn on Wi-Fi.
NOTICE
Be sure to place your iPad or iPhone on a stable surface to prevent it from falling over and being damaged.
Apps compatible with the MODX provide many more convenient, enjoyable ways to use this musical
instrument.
For details on how to connect the devices, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual,” which is
available from the Yamaha web site.
NOTE For audio signal transfer, refer to the connection using Lightning to USB Camera Adapter.
Details of compatible smart devices and apps can be found on the following page from the Yamaha web
site.
http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/
Manual Development Department
© 2018 Yamaha Corporation
Published 03/2018 MW-A0
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124
  • Page 125 125
  • Page 126 126
  • Page 127 127
  • Page 128 128
  • Page 129 129
  • Page 130 130
  • Page 131 131
  • Page 132 132
  • Page 133 133
  • Page 134 134
  • Page 135 135
  • Page 136 136
  • Page 137 137
  • Page 138 138
  • Page 139 139
  • Page 140 140
  • Page 141 141
  • Page 142 142
  • Page 143 143
  • Page 144 144
  • Page 145 145
  • Page 146 146
  • Page 147 147
  • Page 148 148
  • Page 149 149
  • Page 150 150
  • Page 151 151
  • Page 152 152
  • Page 153 153
  • Page 154 154
  • Page 155 155
  • Page 156 156
  • Page 157 157
  • Page 158 158
  • Page 159 159
  • Page 160 160
  • Page 161 161
  • Page 162 162
  • Page 163 163
  • Page 164 164
  • Page 165 165
  • Page 166 166
  • Page 167 167
  • Page 168 168
  • Page 169 169
  • Page 170 170
  • Page 171 171
  • Page 172 172
  • Page 173 173
  • Page 174 174
  • Page 175 175
  • Page 176 176
  • Page 177 177
  • Page 178 178
  • Page 179 179
  • Page 180 180
  • Page 181 181
  • Page 182 182
  • Page 183 183
  • Page 184 184
  • Page 185 185
  • Page 186 186
  • Page 187 187
  • Page 188 188
  • Page 189 189
  • Page 190 190
  • Page 191 191
  • Page 192 192
  • Page 193 193
  • Page 194 194
  • Page 195 195
  • Page 196 196
  • Page 197 197
  • Page 198 198
  • Page 199 199
  • Page 200 200
  • Page 201 201
  • Page 202 202
  • Page 203 203
  • Page 204 204
  • Page 205 205
  • Page 206 206
  • Page 207 207
  • Page 208 208
  • Page 209 209
  • Page 210 210
  • Page 211 211
  • Page 212 212
  • Page 213 213
  • Page 214 214
  • Page 215 215
  • Page 216 216
  • Page 217 217

Yamaha MODX8 Handleiding

Type
Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor